advertisement
Reference Manual
How to Use This Reference Manual
The CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual (this document) allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software you’re using to view this document.
If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term.
Displaying the next/previous view
If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different page.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the CL5/CL3/CL1 is provided on
and following. You can use this function tree to find the page that explains an on-screen display or function.
EN
Contents
Function Tree ............................................................................ 4
SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ....................................................... 6
Centralogic section ................................................................. 11
Input and output patching..................................................... 15
CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching .......................... 15
Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer ........................................... 25
Input channels ........................................................................ 27
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color............................................ 28
Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses ................... 35
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .............................. 39
Output channels ..................................................................... 46
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color............................................ 47
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ............................. 48
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) ............................................... 55
Contents
EQ and Dynamics ..................................................................... 56
Grouping and linking .............................................................. 64
Scene memory ......................................................................... 77
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall
Monitor and Cue functions ..................................................... 97
101
102
Talkback and Oscillator.........................................................
106
106
106
108
Meters....................................................................................
111
111
Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console .....................
113
2
Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack ...............................
114
114
115
118
122
130
Using the graphic EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries.....................................
137
I/O device and external head amp .......................................
138
138
138
140
143
144
MIDI.......................................................................................
149
149
149
Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items ...................................
152
Using Control Changes to control parameters .....................................................
155
Using Parameter Changes to control parameters .................................................
157
User settings (Security) ........................................................
158
158
168
169
171
172
173
174
175
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive...............................
177
180
Recorder................................................................................
181
181
Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder.................................
181
183
185
187
Using the CL console with Nuendo Live...............................................................
188
Help function ........................................................................
193
193
3
Contents
193
194
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly...................................................
194
Other functions .....................................................................
196
196
198
200
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses ....................................................
202
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off..............................................
203
204
204
205
206
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) ..............
207
208
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) ...............................
209
Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)................................................
211
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display ..........................................
212
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display ..............................................
213
213
221
Appendices ............................................................................
227
227
228
230
232
233
245
247
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes.............................................
248
250
254
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys .........................................
259
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs.......................................
262
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders ...................................
263
264
271
273
274
275
276
Reference Manual
Function Tree
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner’s Manual (booklet).
Main
SELECTED CHANNEL
OVERVIEW
FUNCTION ACCESS AREA
(20)
CHANNEL PARAMETER
PATCH/NAME
GAIN/PATCH
1ch
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
INPUT DELAY
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
DELAY SCALE
INSERT/DIRECT OUT
1ch
8ch
HPF/EQ
1ch
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
DYNAMICS
1ch
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
Indication only
SEND TO/SEND FROM
TO STEREO/MONO
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
LIBRARY
CHANNEL LIBRARY
EQ LIBRARY
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
Portico5033/Portico5043/U76/Opt-2A/
EQ-1A/DynamicEQ LIBRARY
DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY
RACK
VIRTUAL RACK
RACK MOUNTER
GEQ EDIT
GEQ LINK
EFFECT RACK
EFFECT EDIT
EFFECT TYPE
PREMIUM RACK
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER
PREMIUM RACK EDIT
4
Function Tree
I/O DEVICE
DANTE PATCH
DANTE SETUP
DANTE INPUT PATCH
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
Rio
REMOTE HA EDIT
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
AMP
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
EXTERNAL HA
EXTERNAL HA EDIT
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT
MONITOR
MONITOR
CUE
MONITOR
OSCILLATOR
TALKBACK
METER
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
SETUP
USER SETUP
PREFERENCE
USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List)
USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List)
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP
CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER
FADER ASSIGN SELECT
Reference Manual
Function Tree
SETUP
USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY
CREATE KEY
SAVE KEY
LOGIN
SAVE/LOAD
WORD CLOCK/SLOT
CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH
OUTPUT PORT
MIDI/GPI
MIDI SETUP
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
GPI
FADER START
BUS SETUP
CONSOLE LOCK
DATE/TIME
NETWORK
DANTE SETUP
SCENE
SCENE LIST
GLOBAL PASTE
FADE TIME
SONG SELECT
FOCUS RECALL
PREVIEW
RECORDER
USB
NUENDO LIVE
CH JOB
CH LINK MODE
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
RECALL SAFE MODE
CH COPY MODE
CH MOVE MODE
CH DEFAULT MODE
PATCH
PORT SELECT
CH SELECT
,
,
Others
CONFIRMATION
SOFT KEYBORD
LOGIN
(21)
Startup Menu
MODE SELECT
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
INPUT PORT TRIM
OUTPUT PORT TRIM
SLOT OUTPUT TRIM
FADER CALIBRATION
CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION
NOTE
• The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5.
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, some screens will not show channels and faders that do not exist on those models.
5
Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
This chapter explains how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen to control the selected channel.
About the SELECTED CHANNEL section
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located to the left of the display corresponds to the mixer module on a conventional analog mixer, and enables you to manually adjust all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL] key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip, either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels will be linked. You can use the knobs on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain, HPF/EQ settings, the threshold setting of the dynamics processors, pan/balance settings, and send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
1.
Use a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control.
To select a channel, press a [SEL] key in the top panel channel strip section, the Centralogic section, or the master section.
Press the appropriate bank select key so that the channels you want to control are assigned to the top panel.
Channel number
Channel name
The number and name of the currently-selected channel is shown in the channel select field located in the Function Access Area of the touch screen.
NOTE
• If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same [SEL] key.
• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access
Area. Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the field to select the next channel.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
2.
Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the currently-selected channel. If you leave this screen displayed, you will always be able to view the settings in the screen while operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
NOTE
If you have turned on the option “POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the
PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button), pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the popup window (1ch).
Even if a different screen is selected, the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section will always affect the currently-selected channel. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will appear on screen when you operate a knob.
3.
Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons on the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel.
6
Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
■ SEND field
In this field, you can view the send level from the channel to each MIX/
MATRIX bus, switch the on/off status of the send signals, and switch between pre and post.
1
Tabs
Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be displayed in the SEND field.
• MIX1–16 tab.............................. displays MIX buses 1–16.
• MIX17–24/MATRIX tab ......... displays MIX buses 17–24 and
MATRIX buses 1–8.
The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels (odd-numbered and evennumbered) are comprised of two mono channels or a stereo channel.
1
SELECTED CHANNEL section
If the destination bus channels are two mono channels:
1
2
3
1 SEND knob
Sets the send level to the corresponding bus.
2 PRE indicator
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
3 ON button
Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.
If the destination bus is a stereo channel:
1
2
3
7
1 SEND/PAN knob
The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (even-numbered and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the same signal.
2 PRE indicator
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
3
ON button
Press the right-hand button to switch on or off the signal sent to two bus channels.
NOTE
• If the indices of a SEND/PAN knob are white, the send point is assigned as PRE; if the indices are black, it is assigned as POST.
• If the send point is PRE, you can specify the PRE point as either VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE
FADER] in the BUS SETUP popup that appears when you press the SETUP button
→ BUS
SETUP button.
• If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers
1
–
2
mentioned above will not be displayed. The send level will be fixed at nominal level, and the send point will be fixed at POST
FADER. For details, see “ Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses ” on page 202
.
• Press the SEND LEVEL knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch popup window.
Reference Manual
■ GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog gain settings, and view the operational status of the head amp.
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the head amp.
For a channel to which the head amp has not been patched, a gray circle appears, instead of the knob. Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch popup window.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
1
2
3 4
2 OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power on or off status for the head amp.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp.
NOTE
• For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp,
1
will be a gray circle and
3
will not be shown. For an output channel,
1
will be a gray circle, and
2
–
4
will not be shown.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP
→ PREFERENCE screen, the digital gain knob will appear for
1
, and
3
will not be displayed.
For details, refer to “
Making HA (Head Amp) settings ” on page 30 .
■ PAN/BALANCE field
This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this popup window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
1 2
SELECTED CHANNEL section
2 ST/MONO button
Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR button appears in location
2
.
The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2
When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected:
1 BALANCE knob
If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the
BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust the volume balance for the left and right channels. If the channel signal is monaural, a gray circle will appear in this location.
Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch popup window.
1
■ INPUT DELAY field
This field enables you to view the delay settings.
1 ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay. If the delay is off, the indicator will not be displayed.
1
2
2 Delay time
The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the ms value appears in the middle row.
Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window.
■ HPF field (input channels only)
This field enables you to set the HPF.
1 HPF knob
Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
1
2
2 ON button
Switches the HPF on or off.
If an output channel is selected, a gray circle will appear in location
1
, and button
2
will be hidden.
8
Reference Manual
■ EQ parameter field
This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings.
1 Q knob
Specifies the Q for each band.
If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H. SHELF (highshelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L. SHELF (lowshelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the filter type name will be displayed.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
■ EQ graph field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/
EQ 1ch popup window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF and EQ.
1 2 3
NOTE
• Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving.
• Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to low-shelving.
• If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel counterclockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to HPF.
• You can also switch the filter type on the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window.
2 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band.
3 GAIN knob
Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band.
NOTE
• If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN knob on the panel.
• If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN knob on the panel.
• Press each knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window.
■ DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field
This field enables you to view and set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.
1 2
3
4
1
OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
2
Level meter
Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange) when the
Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line.
3 Threshold
Specifies the threshold.
4 Parameters
Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch popup window, in which you can make detailed parameter settings.
9
Reference Manual
■ INSERT field
This field enables you to make insert settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch popup window.
2 ON button
Switches the insert on or off.
4 3
1
2
3 RACK EDIT popup button
Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit screen for the inserted rack.
4 IN indicator
Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is sent to the insert-in.
■ DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make insert settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch popup window. The Direct Out level value will appear below the button.
2 ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
1 2
■ RECALL SAFE field
This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE popup window.
1
3
2
2 ON button
Switches the Recall Safe status on or off.
3 PARTIAL indicator
This will light if recall safe applies only to some of the parameters, not to all channel settings.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
■ FADER field
This field enables you to view and make settings for the channel on/ off status and the level.
1 Fader
Displays the current level.
Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels.
1
2 Level indicator
Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the ΣCLIP indicator will light.
2
3
3 ON button
Switches the channel status on or off. The button is linked with the corresponding [ON] key on the top panel.
■ DCA/MUTE field
This field enables you to view and select the DCA or mute group to which the channel is assigned.
1 Tabs
Select DCA or mute as a group to set. Press the selected tab once again to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
When the DCA group tab is selected:
2 DCA group select buttons
Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
3 Mute group indicators
Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
1
3
2
When the mute group tab is selected:
4 Mute group select buttons
Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights orange.
5 MUTE SAFE button
Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group.
6 DCA group indicators
Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
6
5
4
10
Reference Manual
Centralogic section
This chapter explains how to use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to simultaneously control up to eight channels.
About the Centralogic section
The Centralogic section is located below the touch screen, and lets you recall and simultaneously control a set of up to eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you want to control.
Centralogic section
Operations in the Centralogic section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the Centralogic section.
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA groups that you want to control.
When you press a Bank Select key, the LED of that key will light. The touch screen will display the
OVERVIEW screen, and the parameters of the eight channels you selected will appear.
NOTE
When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed, you can switch to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing any of the multifunction knobs 1–8. This is convenient if you want to quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups selected for control.
2.
Use the faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the group of up to eight selected channels and switch them on or off.
NOTE
• The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the faders, [ON] keys and [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section.
• The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction knobs 1–8 in the Centralogic section.
3.
Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the parameters for the group of up to eight channels.
Bank Select keys
If you press one of the Bank Select keys, the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section.
11
Reference Manual
OVERVIEW screen
■ CHANNEL NAME field
This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number, name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected channel is highlighted.
: Selected channel
: Unselected channel
NOTE
If you have retained the channels assigned to the faders in the Centralogic section by pressing and holding down a Bank Select key, the channel names shown at the top and bottom of the
OVERVIEW screen may differ.
12
Centralogic section
■ GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings and view the operational status of the head amp.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel.
If the head amp is patched:
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the head amp.
1
2
3
4
• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding knob in the Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a knob in the Centralogic section, press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch popup window.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when the signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
NOTE
• If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be displayed.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen, the digital GAIN knob will appear instead of knob
1
, and indicator
3
will not be displayed.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
If the slot is patched:
The slot name will appear.
If the rack is connected:
The patch and module name will appear.
If the output is connected:
Only the patch will appear.
Reference Manual
■ INPUT DELAY field
This field displays the delay status for the input channel. If an output channel has been selected, this field will be blank. Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window.
1
1 DELAY ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
■ INSERT/DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make insert and Direct Out settings. Press this field to open the INSERT/
DIRECT OUT 8ch popup window.
1
2
1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the insert on/off status.
2 DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the Direct Out on/off status.
■ EQ field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ.
Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window, in which you can set the HPF and EQ.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
■ DYNAMICS 1/2 field
This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics 1/2.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch popup window.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
■ SEND field
This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post settings for 16 buses.
To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX 1–16] or [MIX 17–24/MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the panel.
Use the Centralogic multifunction knobs to adjust the send level for each bus.
Touch the knob of the bus you want to operate; it will be assigned to the
Centralogic multifunction knobs. If it is assigned to the multifunction knobs, touching that knob once again will display the SEND 8ch popup screen.
This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus.
If the destination bus is VARI (mono):
The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post status. If the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting, the knob scale color turns black.
If the destination bus is VARI (stereo):
If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the lefthand knob will function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will function as the SEND knob.
If the destination bus is set to FIXED:
The SEND ON/OFF button will appear instead of each knob.
Centralogic section
13
Reference Manual
■ TO STEREO/MONO field
This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If you press this field, the knob will be assigned to the corresponding knob in the Centralogic section.
If you press the field once again, the TO STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window will appear.
This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1
2
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
2 ST/MONO indicator
Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in location 2 .
2
When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected:
The ΣCLIP indicator appears, indicating that the signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
Centralogic section
■ DCA group field
A DCA group (1–16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row in this field.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
■ Mute group field
A mute group (1–8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field. If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, “S” (Safe) will appear on the third row.
If the dimmer level has been set for a mute group, the color of the characters changes from red to orange.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating the balance of the left/right channels.
14
Reference Manual
Input and output patching
This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs.
CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching
The following diagram shows the signal flow through the CL series console, I/O devices, and Dante audio network.
I/O device
ID #3
I/O device
ID #1
Dante-MY16-AUD
Dante Network
Up to 512 channels
(logical value)
SW
I/O device
ID #2
64/512
Dante patching
OMNI
8
MY
16
MY
16
MY
16
“Dante” (ports)
64
INPUT PATCH
CL internal patching
Input and output patching
Input patching
CL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network patching and
CL console internal patching.
For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window. In this window, you can patch CL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels can be input from a
Dante audio network to a CL series console. You can choose up to 64 channels from maximum of 512 channels (logical value) of Dante audio network signals. Select the I/O devices (within 64 channels) that you want to control from the CL series console.
Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window) to channels on the CL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1–64 in the GAIN/
PATCH popup window.
NOTE
By default, DANTE 1–64 are assigned to input channels 1–64.
Output patching
Use the OUTPUT PORT popup window to patch CL console’s output channels and Dante audio network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1–64 ports.
NOTE
By default, MIX 1–24 are assigned to DANTE 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 are assigned to DANTE 25–32,
STEREO L/R are assigned to DANTE 33/34, and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35.
Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1–64 (assigned in the OUTPUT PORT popup window) to
I/O device outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH popup window of the I/O device to make these assignments.
CL series console
15
Reference Manual
Changing the output patch settings
To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port.
Selecting the output port for each output channel
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen containing the output channel for which you want to assign the output port.
Channel number/Channel name
2
7
Input and output patching
In the PATCH/NAME popup window you can change the channel name, icon, and output port assigned to each output channel. The window includes the following items.
3 4 5
1
6
2.
In the top part of the screen, press the channel number/channel name field to access the PATCH/NAME popup window.
1 PATCH button
Indicates the port that is patched to the input or output channel. Press this button to enable the
PATCH tab at the bottom of the screen. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set.
NOTE
Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console.
3 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. Press this button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen. The CH COLOR/ICON popup window will appear, enabling you to select the color, icon, and channel name.
4 Channel number display box
Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed.
16
Reference Manual
5 Channel name edit box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at the bottom of the screen. The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name.
6 Category select list
Selects the type of the port you want to display on the screen.
7 Port select buttons
Enable you to select a port in the current category. To cancel the selection, press the same button once again.
3.
Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be assigned to that channel.
If the output port select buttons are not shown at the bottom of the window, press the PATCH tab.
4.
Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys to switch the output channels being controlled, and specify their output ports in the same way.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
Input and output patching
Selecting the output channel for each output port
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
OUTPUT PORT button
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the screen, press the OUTPUT
PORT button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window.
17
Reference Manual
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
In the OUTPUT PORT popup window, you can assign the source channel for each output port.
This popup window includes the following items.
2
0
1
Slot number/Card type
If an output channel of slot 1–3 is selected for operations, this area indicates the slot number and the type of I/O card installed in that slot.
2 DELAY SCALE button
Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
3
Output port
This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned.
4
Channel select popup button
Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name of the currently-selected channel is displayed.
5 Delay time knob
Sets the delay time of the output port. Press this knob to select it, and then use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the settings. The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY SCALE popup window is indicated below the knob.
NOTE
If you have selected ms (millisecond) as the scale, the delay time value will not appear above the knob.
18
Input and output patching
6 DELAY button
Switches the output port delay on or off.
7 Ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase and reverse phase.
8 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob on screen to select it, and then operate multifunction knobs 1–8. Rotate the knob to set the value in the range of –96 to +24 dB in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the value in
0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob.
9 Level meter
Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port.
0 Output port select tabs
Switch the output ports controlled in the popup window in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group, press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row.
3.
Use the output port select tabs at the bottom of the popup window to select the output port you want to control.
The tabs correspond to the following output ports.
• DANTE 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56, 57–64
These tabs control the output channels of the Dante connectors.
• SLOT1 1–8, 9–16
• SLOT2 1–8, 9–16
• SLOT3 1–8, 9–16
These tabs enable you to control output channels 1–8 and 9–16 of slots 1–3 respectively.
• OMNI 1–8
This tab enables you to control OMNI jacks 1–8.
• DIGITAL OUT
This tab enables you to control the L/R channels of the DIGITAL OUT connector.
• PATCH VIEW1
• PATCH VIEW2
These tabs display lists of patches.
4.
To assign a channel to an output port, press the channel select popup window for that port.
Reference Manual
1
The CH SELECT popup window will appear. This popup window includes the following items.
2
Input and output patching
5.
Use the channel select tabs and the channel select buttons to select the source channel, and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the OUTPUT PORT popup window.
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere.
6.
Make settings for delay, phase, and output gain as necessary.
7.
Repeat steps 3–6 to assign channels to other output ports.
8.
When you have finished making settings, click the “x” symbol in the upper right of the window to return to the previous screen.
Changing the input patch settings
This section explains how to change the patching of each input channel.
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the input channel to which you want to assign the input source.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following channels. They vary depending on the output port type.
• MIX/MATRIX.................................. MIX 1–MIX 24, MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
• ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ................. STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), MONI L, MONI R,
MONI C, CUE L, CUE R
• DIRECT OUT 1–32......................... CH1–CH32 Direct Outs
• DIRRECT OUT 33–64.................... CH33–CH64 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 65–72 ...................... CH65–CH72 Direct Outs
• INSERT OUT 1–32.......................... CH1–CH32 Insert-outs
• INSERT OUT 33–64 ....................... CH33–CH64 Insert-outs
• INSERT OUT 65–72 ....................... CH65–CH72 Insert-outs
• INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX ....... Insert-outs for MIX1-MIX24, MATRIX 1-MATRIX8
• INSERT OUT ST/MONO .............. Insert-outs for STEREO L, STEREO R, and MONO (C)
• CASCADE MIX/MATRIX............. MIX1–MIX24, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
• CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE.......... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), CUE L, CUE R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 Channel select buttons
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port you selected in step 3.
19
2.
In the top part of the screen, press the channel number/channel name field to access the PATCH/NAME popup window.
Reference Manual
1
5
4
In the PATCH/NAME popup window you can view and change the channel name, icon, channel color, and input port assigned to each input channel.
2 3
6
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen.
2
Channel icon button
Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3 Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
4
Category select list
Selects the category of input port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following input ports. They vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1–32 ..............DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 ............DANTE33–DANTE64
• OMNI/PB OUT.........OMNI1–OMNI8, PB OUT(L), PB OUT(R)
• SLOT1 .........................SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 .........................SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 .........................SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
20
Input and output patching
• EFFECT RACK......... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK.... PR1L(A)–PR2R(B)
5 Input port select buttons
Assign an input port to the currently-selected input channel.
6 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
3.
Access the input port selection screen of the PATCH/NAME popup window, and then use the input port select tabs and input port select buttons to select an input port.
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere.
4.
When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
NOTE
You can also select input ports from the GAIN/PATCH popup window.
5.
Repeat step 2–4 to assign input ports for other channels.
Reference Manual
Inserting an external device into a channel
If desired, you can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT,
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the location of the insert-out/in points can be specified individually for each channel.
1.
As desired, connect your external equipment to an OMNI IN/OUT jack or to an
I/O card installed in slots 1–3.
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (see page 198 ).
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel to which you want to assign the input source.
3.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, you can view or change the type of input/output port used for insertion and the location at which insertion will occur. There are two variations of this popup window; one-channel and eight-channel.
Each window view includes the following items.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch)
3
Input and output patching
3 INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off.
To change the currently-selected insert point, press one of the three blocks that does not contain any buttons.
NOTE
You can set the I/O ports to function as an insert for each block.
4
APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert position/Direct Out position will be applied to all input channels.
5
APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)
Specifies whether the insert position settings will be applied to all output channels.
■ INSERT IN HA field
This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the insert-in.
6 7 8
1
2
6
+48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
7
A.GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting for the head amp. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain.
8 HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
4 5
1
INSERT OUT button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
2 INSERT IN button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
21
Reference Manual
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch)
1
2
3
4
Input and output patching
4.
Access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and then press the INSERT OUT button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port used for insert-out. The window includes the following items.
2
1
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear on the button.
2
INSERT OUT button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
3 INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above the button.
4
INSERT IN button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button. You can also view the insertin level by checking the indicator located to the right of the port button (that is displayed as an option).
1 Category select list
Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following output ports. They vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI .......................................... OMNI1–OMNI8
• SLOT1 ......................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ......................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ......................................... SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
• GEQ RACK ................................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ16R(B) (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and
MONO channels only)
• EFFECT RACK.......................... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK..................... PR1L(A)–PR8R(B)
2
Output port select buttons
These buttons assign the output port that will be used as insert-out for the currently-selected channel.
NOTE
If a rack in which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
22
Reference Manual
5.
Use the category and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used as insert-out, and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
6.
Press the INSERT IN button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input port used for insert-in. The categories correspond to the following input ports.
• OMNI.......................................... OMNI1–OMNI8
• SLOT1 ......................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ......................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ......................................... SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
• GEQ RACK ................................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ16R(B) (Output channels only)
• EFFECT RACK ......................... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK .................... PR1L(A)–PR2R(B)
7.
Specify the input port you will use for insert-in, and press the CLOSE button.
8.
Press the INSERT ON/OFF button to turn it ON.
In this state, insert-out/in is enabled. Adjust the input/output levels of your external device if necessary.
NOTE
• If you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the
INSERT IN HA field.
• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.
9.
If you want to change the insert-out/in position, access the one-channel INSERT/
DIRECT OUT popup button, and press one of the three INSERT fields.
The INSERT field you pressed will be enabled.
10.
When you have finished making all settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
11.
As desired, make insert settings for other channels as well.
Input and output patching
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O device, from the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot.
1.
Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack, OUTPUT jack, or to an I/O card installed in slot 1–3.
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (see page 198 ).
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel that you want to output directly.
3.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
There are two variations of this popup window; one-channel and eight channel. Each window view includes the following items.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch)
1
4
2 3 5
1
DIRECT OUT field
Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct output position.
23
Reference Manual
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Direct Out output port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
3 DIRECT OUT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knob.
5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input channels.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch)
Input and output patching
4.
Access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and press the DIRECT OUT popup button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port used for direct output. The window includes the following items.
1
2
1
2
3
1
DIRECT OUT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Output point is indicated above the button.
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Direct Out output port. The name of the currently-selected port will appear on the button.
3
DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knob.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following output ports. They vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI/REC ............... OMNI1–OMNI8, REC IN(L), REC IN(R)
• SLOT1 ........................ SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ........................ SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ........................ SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
• DANTE1–32.............. DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64............ DANTE33–DANTE64
2
Output port select buttons
These buttons assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel.
5.
Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used for direct output, and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
24
Reference Manual
6.
Press the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button to turn it ON.
In this state, direct output is enabled. Adjust the input level of your external device as necessary.
NOTE
With the factory settings, all are turned off.
7.
If you want to change the position of the direct output, access the one-channel
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup button, and press one of the DIRECT OUT fields.
The DIRECT OUT field you pressed will be enabled.
8.
If you want to adjust the level of the direct output, access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and operate the DIRECT
OUT LEVEL knob.
9.
When you have finished making all settings, click the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
10.
As desired, make direct output settings for other channels as well.
Input and output patching
Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer
If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes a CL console and I/O devices, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) driver software. DVS works as an audio interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network (that includes a CL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be able to make multi-track recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a virtual sound check.
This section explains how to perform the setup to add DAW software to an audio network.
Required devices and software
• CL series console; I/O device
• A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit Ethernet
(GbE) network; DAW software
• A GbE-compatible network switch
• CAT5e cable
• Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software
• Dante Controller control software
NOTE
You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. The license ID is included in the CL unit package.
The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at the following website: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Using Nuendo Live
Steinberg’s Nuendo Live DAW software can be used with the CL series console, taking advantage of
functionality that makes them work well together. For details, refer to “ Using the CL console with
” on
.
25
Reference Manual
Word clock settings
In a Dante network, the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the network. If the master device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device will automatically take over as the clock master.
To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then WORD CLOCK/
SLOT button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window.
Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard
Install a Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and the
Dante Controller in a computer that you want to use for audio recording.
Then, connect the GbE-compatible network port on the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
Before you start DVS, select the desired audio format (e.g., 48kHz, 24-bit) and Dante latency.
(Select a higher latency value to maintain network stability during the use of many channels.) For
Advanced settings, select the number of channels to be used for recording and playback (the default is 8 x 8). Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard
User’s Guide for more information on the ASIO setting (Windows).
Input and output patching
Setting up Dante Controller
Connect the network port on the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
The following settings can be made via Dante Controller.
• For multi-track recording: Patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS for multi-track recording.
• For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the CL console.
Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings of the
Dante Controller.
Setting up DAW software
You must make driver settings in your DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante
Virtual Soundcard-ASIO” (for Windows PC) or “Dante” (for Mac).
Some DAW software may require internal patching with the driver. For more information, refer to the
DAW software manual.
If you’re using Nuendo Live DAW software, see also “ Using the CL console with Nuendo Live
” on
.
Audio recording and playback
After you have made the driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back audio.
For multi-track recording, set the input ports for tracks in DAW software to the ports that receive audio signals from the I/O device.
For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the CL console. To do so, to patch the signals so that the signals will be output from the DAW software to
DANTE 1–64 on the CL console. It may be convenient for you later if you store two sets of the DANTE
INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for routing audio signals from the I/O device, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW software. In this way, you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel
(such as a vocal) to the I/O device to monitor during a virtual sound check.
26
Reference Manual
Input channels
This chapter explains various operations for input channels.
Signal flow for input channels
The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1–3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows.
MONO channel
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned.
MIX
1 2
ST
M
O
N
O
L R (C)
MATRIX
1 2 .
7 8
CUE
L R
72
{64,
48}
CH 1-72{64,48}
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CH INSERT OUT
1-72{64,48}
CH INSERT IN
1-72{64,48}
INSERT POINT
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER/POST ON
PRE HPF
METER
Digital
GAIN
HPF
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE HPF PRE EQ POST EQ
OSCILLATOR
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX21-24 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64, 65-72]POST EQ(CL5)
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64]POST EQ(CL3)
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48]POST EQ(CL1)
EQ OUT
METER
DYNA1OUT
METER
GR METER
DYNA2OUT
METER
GR METER
GATE
DUCK
EXPAND
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
COMP
COMPAND
DE-ESSER
To MIX
FIXED
To MIX
PRE FADER
METER
INSERT
LEVEL/
DCA1-16
ON
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
POST ON
POST PAN L
DELAY
Max
1000ms
ON
ON
ON
POST PAN R
ON
ON LEVEL
POST ON
METER
INSERT
CSR
POST ON
POST ON
INSERT OUT
PAN LINK
ON
ON
ON
ON
DIRECT OUT 1-72{64,48}
PAN
LR MONO
LCR
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
TO MONO TO ST
TO LCR
To OUTPUT PATCH
PAN MODE
MIX1,3...23
MIX2,4...24
To MIX
VARI
To MIX
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
PAN
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
To MATRIX
VARI
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
PAN
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
CUE L
CUE R
Input channels
STEREO channel
These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the EFFECT RACK 1–8 is assigned.
1 2
MIX
2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R
16
ST IN 1L–8R
PRE HPF
METER
OSCILLATOR
Digital
GAIN
HPF
PRE HPF
All parameters for L and R are linked to each other (except for
PRE EQ
METER
ATT
PRE EQ
4BAND
EQ
EQ OUT
METER
DYNA1OUT
METER
GR METER
DYNA2OUT
METER
GR METER
POST EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX21-24 OUT
ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ
GATE
DUCK
EXPAND
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
COMP
COMPAND
DE-ESSER
To MIX
PRE FADER
METER
DELAY
Max
1000ms
LEVEL/
DCA1-16
PRE FADER
SAME as INPUT1-72{64,48}
Ø (phase), Digital GAIN, Delay, and PAN).
To MATRIX
SAME as INPUT1-72{64,48}
ON
POST ON
METER
POST ON
PAN/BAL
LR MONO
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
TO MONO TO ST
LCR
CSR
PAN LINK
TO LCR
PAN MODE
MIX1,3...23
MIX2,4...24
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
ON
CUE L
CUE R
27
• INPUT PATCH
Assigns input signals to the input channels.
• Ø (phase)
Switches the phase of the input signal.
• DIGITAL GAIN
Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.
• HPF (High Pass Filter)
This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating, ducking, expander, or compressor.
• DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
• INPUT DELAY
Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms.
• LEVEL/DCA 1–16
Adjusts the input level of the channel.
• ON (on/off)
Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
• PAN
Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. For the STEREO channel, you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The BALANCE parameter adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP popup window so that the setting of the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo.
Reference Manual
• LCR (Left/Center/Right)
Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal that consists of the L/R channel plus the center channel.
• MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–24.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1–24 (MATRIX send levels 1–24)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–24. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1–8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• INSERT (MONO channels only)
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• DIRECT OUT (MONO channels only)
You can patch this to any output port to send out the input signal directly from the corresponding output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• METER
Meters the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is detected
(see
).
Input channels
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color
On the CL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel. This section explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color.
1.
Access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel for which you want to specify the channel name, icon and channel color.
Channel number/Channel name field
2.
Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by pressing the channel number/channel name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name, icon and channel color.
28
Reference Manual
Input channels
1
This popup window contains the following items:
2 3
3.
Press the desired channel icon button.
The lower part of the popup window will change as follows.
1
2
3
4
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-patched port. Press this button to enable the PATCH tab at the bottom of the screen. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. Press this button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen. The CH COLOR/ICON popup window will appear, enabling you to select the color, icon, and channel name.
3 Channel name edit box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at the bottom of the screen. The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name.
4 Tabs
Use these tabs to switch between items.
29
1 Channel color select buttons
Select a channel color. Pressing the button will immediately apply the change.
2 Icon select buttons
Select a channel icon. Pressing the button will immediately apply the change.
3 Sample name setup buttons
Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later.
4.
Use the icon select buttons to select the icon you want to use for the channel. You can use the channel color select buttons to select the color of the channel.
The selected icon or color will appear on the icon button in the upper part of the window.
5.
To edit the channel name based on a sample name, use the sample name setup buttons to select a sample name.
The sample name you selected will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the window.
To enter the channel name directly, proceed to Step 6.
NOTE
You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a consecutive number, such as “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a number.
Reference Manual
6.
If you want to enter a channel name directly (or edit a sample name that has been entered), press the channel name field in the upper part of the window.
The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the screen, allowing you to enter or edit the characters.
Input channels
Making HA (Head Amp) settings
This section explains how to make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for each input channel.
Setting the analog gain
1.
To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
2.
To edit detailed parameter settings such as phantom power on/off or phase, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel for which you want to adjust the head amp.
GAIN/PATCH field
7.
Use the [SEL] keys to switch input channels, and specify the icon or channel name for other channels in the same way.
When the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed, you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel to be controlled.
8.
When you finish your data input, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window.
NOTE
Press the TAB button to switch to the next channel. You can also press the ENTER button to close the popup window in the same way as using the “x” symbol.
3.
Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the head amp. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
This popup window features four types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of these four views. Each window view includes the following items.
30
Reference Manual
GAIN/PATCH popup window (1ch)
1 8
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator
Displays the channel icon, channel number, and channel name.
2 HA section
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel. This section enables you to operate the following HA-related controllers:
• +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. If the
Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
• HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
NOTE
• If a slot is patched to the channel, this section
2
will display the type of the slot/MY card and slot meter instead.
• If a rack is patched to the channel, this section
2
will display the rack type and the effect type.
• If nothing is patched, section
2
will be blank.
• GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing the input signal from the I/O device, and if the analog gain is adjusted on the FOH console, this function will prevent the level of the signal received on the monitoring console from fluctuating. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned off, the analog gain and digital gain will return to the level that was obtained when you turned on the function. Therefore, the level on the digital network will remain the same.
31
Input channels
• Gain compensation meter
Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation.
3 INPUT PORT button
Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press the button to display the PATCH popup window, in which you can select a port to patch.
4 Icon/Channel name button
Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/NAME popup window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name.
5 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input.
6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
7 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after digital gain.
8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
Reference Manual
GAIN/PATCH popup window (8ch)
1
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
1 Channel select button
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.
2 PATCH button
Press this button to display the PORT SELECT popup window to patch the input port to the input channel.
3
+48V button
This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched. Press the button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off.
NOTE
If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the mini-YGDAI card will be displayed.
4 A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
5 Level meter
Indicates the input signal level.
32
Input channels
6 GC (Gain Compensation) button
Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel.
7 Ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the input signal.
8 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain.
9 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after digital gain.
GAIN/PATCH popup window
(1-48, 49-72/ST IN(CL5), 49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1))
This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section.
2 1 2 1
3
1
Parameter select buttons
Select one of the following parameters to view in the window.
• ANALOG GAIN........................ Analog gain
• DIGITAL GAIN ........................ Digital gain
• PATCH ........................................ Patch selection
2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
3 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
Reference Manual
Input channels
■ If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button:
1
2
3
4
1 GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to control the gain value using the multifunction knob. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3
+48V indicator
Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel.
4
Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
NOTE
If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized, the knob addition, the indicator
1
will be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination. In
3
will not be displayed.
If the input channel is patched to the VIRTUAL RACK, the knob
1
will be replaced with the port
ID of the rack.
If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob
1
will be replaced with a dotted line “----”.
■ If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button:
2
1
3
1
GAIN knob
Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to control the gain value using the multifunction knob.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3
Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
■ If you press the PATCH parameter select button:
1
1 PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input port to patch to the channel.
4.
Access either the 1ch or 8ch GAIN/PATCH popup window.
5.
Use the on-screen buttons or the multifunction knobs to edit the head amp gain, phase, and phantom power on/off settings.
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
• The GAIN knob and +48V button are valid only on channels for which the assigned input port is an INPUT jack on the I/O device, the OMNI IN on the CL unit, or a slot that is connected to an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES).
6.
Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired.
If you are viewing the 1ch GAIN/PATCH popup window, you can also use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel for editing.
If you are viewing the 8ch GAIN/PATCH popup window, you can use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight.
7.
When you finish editing, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window.
33
Reference Manual
Setting the Gain Compensation function
If you are using an I/O device (such as an Rio3224-D) on a Dante network, you can maintain the constant level of signal output to the audio network by using the Gain Compensation function. If the
FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device is changed.
To do so, follow the steps below:
1.
Sets the analog gain as described previously.
2.
Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear.
3.
Press the GAIN field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
4.
Press the GC button located to the right of the A. GAIN knob.
Input channels
Adjusting the digital gain
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the CL’s input channels.
Follow the steps below:
1.
Press the [SEL] key for the input channel that you want to control.
2.
Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear.
3.
Press the GAIN field.
The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
When the function is turned on, the button will light. Press the button once again to turn it off.
If you adjust the analog gain value while the Gain Compensation function is turned on, the head amp level will change accordingly. However, the level of the signal output to the audio network will automatically be corrected to the level obtained when you turned Gain Compensation on. If you turn Gain Compensation off while in this state, the analog gain and the compensated gain within the I/O device will return to the settings that were in effect when you turned Gain
Compensation on. Therefore, the signal level on the audio network will remain the same.
NOTE
Since the compensated gain is the gain used to automatically compensate the gain within the I/
O device, it is not shown as a parameter. The position at the moment this was turned on will be displayed.
4.
Use multifunction knob 8 to adjust the D. GAIN parameter.
NOTE
• Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value by using the GAIN knob on the corresponding channel strip or the GAIN knob in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
• You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN
→ DIGITAL GAIN to a USER
DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key.
34
Reference Manual
Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain
Compensation is on
If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I/O device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount. Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the digital domain.
For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to +45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated by –15 dB).
At this time, the gain of each signal input to the CL series unit will be adjusted by the digital gain parameter of the CL series console. If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/
O device, adjusting the analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console, because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level.
However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted.
NOTE
You can perform this operation rapidly if you’ve assigned Gain Compensation on/off for the SET
BY SEL function to one of the USER DEFINED keys.
Input channels
Sending a signal from an input channel to the
STEREO/MONO buses
This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used mainly to send signals to the main speakers. There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as follows.
■ ST/MONO mode
This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually.
• The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO
ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
• The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals sent to the STEREO bus L/R individually (see
■ LCR mode
This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) simultaneously.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on or off collectively.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
• The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure.
35
Reference Manual
1.
Make sure that an input source is connected to the input channel you are adjusting.
Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the head amp to obtain the optimum input signal.
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
4
5
6
1
2
3
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch)
Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of signals sent from input channels to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
STEREO/MONO field
3.
In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust, and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can control signals that is sent from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window features four views. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of the four views. Each window view includes the following items.
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2
Mode LEDs
3
MODE (ST/MONO/LCR mode select) button
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR. The LED of the currentlyselected mode will light.
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals sent from each channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For MONO channels, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of signals sent to the STEREO bus. For STEREO channels, this acts as a PAN knob, and also as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
36
Reference Manual
7
7 PAN/BALANCE MODE button
Switches the knob function of the TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob on the STEREO channel.
If the ST/MONO/LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are displayed instead of the ST/MONO button
4
.
8
9
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO popup window
(CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1))
Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
You can also adjust the pan or balance setting in groups of eight selected channels.
23
4
8 LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signal will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then
operate the corresponding multifunction knob. (see page 38
)
37
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4 ST/MONO indicators
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/
MONO bus.
4.
Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
Reference Manual
5.
Use the MODE button to select either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
6.
In the MASTER section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key for the
STEREO channel/MONO channel is turned on, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
7.
In the INPUT section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key is turned on for the input channel you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 5.
■ Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
8.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the STEREO/MONO button to individually turn on/off the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/
MONO bus.
For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually.
9.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus.
■ Channels for which LCR mode is selected
8.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively.
For a channel that is set to LCR mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus are switched on or off collectively.
9.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
Input channels
10.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO (C) bus.
If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the level of signals sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST PAN knob
R
Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a STEREO channel will change the level of signals sent from the STEREO L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal sent from the STEREO (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent from the STEREO (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
38
Reference Manual
If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the INPUT TO ST PAN knob will change the level of signals sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram.
Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
PAN knob
R
Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of an ST IN channel will change the level of signals sent from the STEREO L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram.
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus
Input channels
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/
MATRIX bus
This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to MIX buses 1–24 and MATRIX buses 1–8.
The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage, or to effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a master recorder or to a backstage monitoring system.
You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following three ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input channel to all
MIX/MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.
■ Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
■ Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses.
1.
Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect processor, or other device is connected to the corresponding output port.
2.
Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channels that will send signals to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
39
Reference Manual
Input channels
3.
Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
If necessary, you can specify two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX buses as a stereo bus and link the main parameters.
If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent
TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX PAN knob. (If
BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, it will operate as a
BALANCE knob).
4.
In the TO MIX/MATRIX field on screen, make sure that the MIX1–16 button or
MIX17–24/MATRIX button is turned on.
The TO MIX/TO MATRIX field displays the corresponding knobs and buttons. If this button is off, press the button to turn it on.
MIX buses can be either a FIXED type that features a fixed send level, or a VARI type that features a variable send level. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between FIXED and
VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP button, the USER SETUP button, and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP popup window.
If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, a circle ( ) is displayed instead of the TO MIX
SEND LEVEL knob. In this case, you cannot adjust the send level.
If the send-destination MIX bus is a VARI type, or if the send-destination is a MATRIX bus, the
TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob will be displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, you can use the corresponding knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level.
40
For a MONO channel, the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND PAN knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus.
For a STEREO channel, if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch), the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/
MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND BAL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered
MIX/MATRIX bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window
(8ch), the left knob will function as the PAN knob. The right knob will function as send level, just as in BALANCE mode.
5.
Make sure that the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button is turned on for the send-destination MIX bus.
If this button is off, press the button on screen to turn it on.
6.
In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
7.
You can use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to switch input channels and control the send level to all MIX/MATRIX buses in the same way.
Reference Manual
Using the Centralogic section
You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
1.
Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect, or other device is connected to the corresponding output port.
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel that you want to control.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
3.
Press the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send-destination MIX/
MATRIX bus.
A bold frame will appear around all TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MIX/
MATRIX bus.
5
6
7
8
9
0
Input channels
4.
Use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the send level of signals sent from the (up to) eight input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
If necessary, you can use the Bank Select keys to switch the input channels that you want to assign to the Centralogic section, and adjust the send levels from other input channels to the selected
MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
If you want to monitor a signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to assign the corresponding MIX channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the
[CUE] key for that MIX/MATRIX channel.
5.
If you want to make detailed settings for MIX/MATRIX sends, press the TO MIX/
MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again.
When you press the currently-selected TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time, the
MIX SEND popup window or the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear. This window includes the following items.
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
5
6
7
8
9
0
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to “PRE.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
At this time, the PRE/POST button will light.
2 ALL POST button
Sets the send point to “POST.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off.
3 SEND FROM MODE button
Press this button to switch to the “SEND from 8ch” popup window.
4 Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
5 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
41
Reference Manual
Input channels
6 Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
7 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is on, the send point is set to PRE.
8 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
9 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is set to monaural or FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send source is stereo, you can use the PAN/BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to select whether
PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob.
The knob for the mode selected here will appear.
0 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.
If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear.
6.
Use the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the input channels to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus on or off.
7.
If necessary, use the PRE buttons to select the send point of a signal that is sent from each input channel to a VARI type MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• If the PRE button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS SETUP popup window (see
).
• The PRE button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses.
42
Reference Manual
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels to a specific
MIX/MATRIX bus.
1.
Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect, or other device is connected to the corresponding output port.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND
ON status.
If you’ve used the bank select keys to assign input channels to the Centralogic section, the corresponding channels will change to indicating the send levels and ON settings for the signals sent from those channels to the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus. If the Centralogic section has been assigned to output channels, and the send-destination bus is MIX, each channel will still show the fader value and ON setting. If the send-destination bus is MATRIX, the Centralogic section will change to show the send level and ON setting for the signals sent from the MIX/
STEREO/MONO channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus. MATRIX channels will continue showing the channel fader values and ON setting.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX17-24/MATRIX ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses.
Input channels
3.
Press the MIX1-16, MIX17-24/MATRIX switch button repeatedly to select MIX1-16 or MIX17-24/MATRIX.
In this way, you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/
MATRIX buses.
4.
Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
Centralogic section. If you select the buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX1-
16, MIX17-24/MATRIX switch button will be changed automatically.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
5.
Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again.
6.
Repeat steps 4–5 to adjust the send level for other MIX/MATRIX buses in the same way.
7.
When you have finished adjusting the MIX/MATRIX send levels, press the “x” symbol in the Function Access Area.
The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit SENDS
ON FADER mode and return to normal mode.
43
Reference Manual
Input channels
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay)
This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using Input Delay function.
This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance, caused by microphone locations on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a delay (a gap) that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for broadcast on TV.
1.
Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
2.
Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
INPUT DELAY field
INPUT DELAY (8ch)
2
3
1
1
DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
3.
Press the INPUT DELAY field to access the INPUT DELAY popup window.
In the INPUT DELAY popup window you can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay. This popup window features three types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of four views. Each window view includes the following items.
You can select one of the four delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of samples), and ms (millisecond).
2 Channel select button
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Indicates the channel delay value. You can use the multifunction knob to adjust it. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (in unit of ms) and below the knob (in the currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear above the knob.
44
Reference Manual
INPUT DELAY (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5),
CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1))
1
2
3
Channel library operations
Input channels
Channel libraries include “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various parameters (including the head amp settings) for input channels.
To recall a library, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
LIBRARY button
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
2 Channel select button
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Indicates the channel delay value. Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction knob. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (in unit of ms) and below the knob (in the currently-selected scale).
NOTE
If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of the knob.
4.
Access the INPUT DELAY (8ch) popup window.
5.
Use the on-screen buttons and the multifunction knobs to set the delay.
6.
Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired.
If you are viewing the 8ch INPUT DELAY popup window, you can use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight.
7.
When you finish editing, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window.
45
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
Reference Manual
Output channels
This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels, MONO channels).
Signal flow for output channels
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channels are provided.
MIX channels
These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus.
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R
MIX 1-24
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH MIX
INSERT OUT 1-24
MIX
INSERT IN 1-24
INSERT POINT
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
CUE ON
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
4BAND
EQ
EQ OUT
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
GR METER
POST EQ
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
COMP
COMPAND
INSERT
EXPAND
Keyin
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
MIX(1-8,9-16,17-24) POST EQ
PRE FADER
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
BAL
LEVEL
LEVEL
ON
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
LEVEL
PAN/BAL
ON
ON
INSERT
POST ON
INSERT OUT
POST ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO
TO LCR
POST ON
METER
LCR
MIX OUT1-24
POST ON
CSR
(21-24)To KEYIN
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
Output channels
STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel
Each of these channels processes the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO
(C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels.
1 2
MIX
2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
INSERT POINT
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO
INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)
STEREO
INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
4BAND
EQ
EQ OUT
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
GR METER
POST EQ
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
COMP
COMPAND
INSERT
EXPAND
Keyin
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ
PRE FADER
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/
CUE ON
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
BAL
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
LEVEL
LEVEL
ON
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
LEVEL
PAN/BAL
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
ON
POST ON
METER
INSERT
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
POST ON
INSERT OUT
POST ON
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
MATRIX channel
These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports.
1 2
MIX
2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R
MATRIX 1-8
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX
INSERT OUT 1-8
MATRIX
INSERT IN 1-8
INSERT POINT
CUE ON
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
4BAND
EQ
EQ OUT
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
GR METER
POST EQ
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
COMP
COMPAND
INSERT
EXPAND
Keyin
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
PRE FADER
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/
BAL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
ON
POST ON
METER
INSERT
MATRIX OUT 1-8
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
INSERT OUT
POST ON
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander.
• LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the channel.
• ON (on/off)
Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
46
Reference Manual
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or
MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus.
• MATRIX (MATRIX send level)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO
(C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1–8. For the position from which the signal will be sent to the
MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel or the
STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.
• INSERT
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.
• METER
Indicates the level of the output channel.
You can switch the position at which the level is detected.
• KEY IN (MIX channels 21–24 only)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21–24 to dynamics processors and use them as key-in signals to control the dynamics.
• RACK IN PATCH
Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack.
• OUTPUT PATCH
Assigns an output port to an output channel.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source.
Output channels
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color
This section explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color for each output channel.
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the output channel for which you want to specify the channel name, icon and channel color.
Channel number/Channel name field
2.
Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by pressing the channel number/channel name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name, icon and channel color.
47
Reference Manual
2 3
1
Output channels
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/
MONO bus
This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode are the same as for input channels.
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the MIX channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
4
Follow the steps for the input channels (see page 29
).
48
STEREO/MONO field
2.
In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust, and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, you can control a signal that is sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window features four types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of the four views. These windows include the following items.
Reference Manual
TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch)
You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2
Mode LEDs
3
MODE (ST/MONO/LCR mode select) button
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR. The LED of the currentlyselected mode will light.
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
Output channels
If the ST/MONO/LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are displayed instead of the ST/MONO button (
4
).
7
8
7 LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
8 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
49
Reference Manual
TO STEREO/MONO popup window (CH1-48,
CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT)
This window displays the status of signals sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO bus/
MONO bus. You can also adjust the pan or balance setting in groups of eight selected channels.
23
4
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning and balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4 ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator is displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
50
Output channels
3.
Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
4.
Use the MODE button to select either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
5.
In the MASTER section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key for the
STEREO channel/MONO channel is turned on, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
6.
Press one of the Output Bank Select Keys in the Centralogic section so that the MIX channels you want to control are recalled to the Centralogic section.
7.
Make sure that the [ON] keys for those channels are on, and use the fader in the
Centralogic section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 4.
■ Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
8.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the STEREO/MONO button to turn a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off.
For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off individually.
9.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus.
■ Channels for which LCR mode is selected
8.
Make sure that the LCR button is turned on in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
Channels for which the LCR button is off will not send a signal to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, press the CSR knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
The CSR knob settings are the same as for input channels.
10.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the panning of signals sent from the
MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and STEREO (L/R) bus.
Refer to
page 38 for details on how the signal level sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each
bus will change according to the operation of the TO ST PAN knob.
Reference Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses
This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses
1–8. You can do this in either of the following three ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from a specific MIX,
STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
■ Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from up to eight
MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
■ Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent from the desired MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
1.
Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that an external device is connected.
2.
Using the Bank Select keys of the Centralogic section, assign MIX channels or
STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section.
3.
Use the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that will send signals to the MATRIX buses.
You can also use the [SEL] key in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO/MONO channels.
Output channels
4.
Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
5.
Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button is turned on for the senddestination MATRIX bus.
If this button is off, press the button on screen to turn it on.
6.
In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
7.
Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to switch channels, and adjust the send level from other channels to the MATRIX buses in the same way.
51
Reference Manual
Using the Centralogic section
This method lets you use the multifunction knobs (in the Centralogic section) to simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired MATRIX bus.
1.
Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your external device is connected to the corresponding output port.
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channels (MIX channels or STEREO/MONO channels) that you want to control.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the
MATRIX bus.
Output channels
4.
Use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the send level of the signals sent from up to eight MIX channels or the STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
If necessary, you can use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to switch the send-source channel.
NOTE
• If you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE] key for that MATRIX channel.
• If you again press the currently-selected MATRIX bus select button, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus.
5.
If you want to make detailed settings for MATRIX sends, press the TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again.
When you press the currently-selected TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time, the
MATRIX SEND popup window will appear. The window includes the following items.
4 1 2 3
5
6
7
8
9
0
3.
Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send-destination MATRIX bus.
A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus.
52
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to “PRE.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
2
ALL POST button
Sets the send point to “POST.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
3 SEND FROM MODE button
Press this button to switch to the “SEND from 8ch” popup window.
4 Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
Reference Manual
Output channels
5 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
6 Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
7 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is on, the send point is set to PRE.
8 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
9 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is set to monaural or FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
The knob for the mode selected here will appear.
0 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.
6.
Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the MIX and
STEREO/MONO channels to the currently-selected MATRIX bus on or off.
7.
If necessary, you can use the PRE buttons to select the point from which the signal is sent from the MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to the MATRIX bus.
8.
Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
If the send source is stereo, you can use the PAN/BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to select whether
PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob.
53
Reference Manual
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and STEREO/
MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
1.
Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system etc. is connected to the corresponding output port.
2.
In the function access area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND
ON status.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX 1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses.
Output channels
4.
Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the function access area to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window, from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
Centralogic section. If you switch buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER switch buttons will also be change automatically.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
5.
Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from the MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
NOTE
You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again.
6.
Repeat steps 4–5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
7.
When you’re finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels, press the X symbol in the function access area.
The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit SENDS
ON FADER mode and return to normal mode.
3.
Use the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 1-
16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX.
Now you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/MATRIX buses.
54
Reference Manual
Output channels
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)
This section explains how to correct delay between output channels by using the Output Delay function.
This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent to speakers that are located at a distance from each other.
Output delay settings are made in the OUTPUT PORT popup window, which will appear when you press the OUTPUT PORT button from the SETUP screen.
.
Channel library operations
Channel libraries include “OUTPUT CHANNEL
LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various parameters (including the head amp settings) for output channels.
To recall the library, while an output channel is selected, press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
LIBRARY button
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using libraries” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
55
Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
This chapter explains the EQ (equalizer) and dynamics that are provided on each channel of the CL series console.
EQ and Dynamics
HPF/EQ popup window (1ch)
This lets you view and edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel.
8 D 1 2 3 4 5
About EQ and dynamics
Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four-band EQ and dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the
EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.
6
7
C
09
B
A
E
F J
G
H
I
Using EQ
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels.
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the EQ.
The EQ field shows the response of the
EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen, you can edit the parameter by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
EQ field
2.
If you want to edit while watching the ATT/HPF/EQ parameter values, press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen to access the HPF/EQ popup window.
In the HPF/EQ popup window, you can edit the EQ and high-pass filter parameters and switch them on/off.
This popup window features five types of views. Each window view includes the following items.
56
1 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the EQ Library popup window.
2 DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values.
3 COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory.
4 PASTE button
Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
5 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory.
If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel.
7 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band.
8 HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to select the high pass filter for the LOW band.
Reference Manual
9 EQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB.
0 HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving type filter for the HIGH band.
A LPF ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band.
B EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off.
C EQ type select button
Switches between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
D EQ graph
This graph displays real-time parameter values for the EQ and filter.
E EQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
F ATT knob
Indicates an attenuation amount before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this.
G HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
H HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this.
I HPF type select button
Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between –12 dB/oct and –6 dB/oct.
J EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicate the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and
HIGH bands. Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs.
NOTE
• If shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for the output channels, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear.
• If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q parameter will not appear.
1
2
3
4
5
EQ and Dynamics
HPF/EQ popup window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of eight channels simultaneously.
Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings. You can adjust the HPF settings of all eight channels displayed.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2 EQ graph
This graph displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type appears below the graph.
3 EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off. The OVER indicator (located to the right above the button) lights if the post-EQ signal is clipping.
4 HPF FREQUENCY knob
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this.
5 HPF ON/OFF button
Switches the HPF on or off.
57
Reference Manual
HPF/EQ popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5),
CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT)
This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously. This page is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels.
1
2
EQ and Dynamics
4.
If you want to use the high-pass filter on an input channel, operate the HPF knob or HPF ON/OFF button in the HPF/EQ popup window.
Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. The HPF ON/
OFF button switches the high-pass filter on or off, and the HPF knob adjusts the cutoff frequency.
NOTE
• Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can turn on the high-pass filter button on the popup window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter.
• For both input channels and output channels, you can turn on the low-pass filter button to use the
HIGH band EQ as a low-pass filter.
5.
If you want to copy EQ settings to another channel, or initialize the EQ settings, use the tool buttons in the HPF/EQ popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
• EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (see page 8 ).
• Even when the HPF/EQ popup window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the EQ.
3
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button.
2 EQ graph
Indicates the total frequency response of the EQ or filter.
3 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
3.
Access the HPF/EQ popup window (1ch), and then press the EQ ON button to enable the EQ.
If the HPF/EQ popup window (1ch) is displayed, you will be able to edit all of the EQ parameters.
58
Reference Manual
Using dynamics
Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics processor.
1.
Use the Bank Select keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the dynamics.
The DYNAMICS 1/2 field displays the dynamics on/off status and the amount of gain reduction.
Dynamics 1 field
Dynamics 2 field
EQ and Dynamics
DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch)
This window displays only the currently-selected channel. All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited. This is convenient if you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel.
8 1 2 3 4 5
6
0
7
9
C
B
A
2.
In the OVERVIEW screen, press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field to access the DYNAMICS
1/2 popup window.
In the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window, you can edit the dynamics settings and turn the processor on or off.
This popup window features five types of views. Each window view includes the following items.
1
LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library popup window.
2
DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values.
3
COPY button
All dynamics parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory.
4
PASTE button
Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
5 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
6
Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel.
59
Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
7 Dynamics type buttons
Enable you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics types.
• Dynamics 1 for an input channel
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER
• GATE or DUCKING:
• COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER:
• Dynamics 2 for an input channel
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER
• COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S:
• DE-ESSER:
• Dynamics 1 for an output channel
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S
8 Dynamics graph
This graph displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors.
9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs
Indicate the dynamics parameter values. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs.
The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type.
60
0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter
These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
A KEY IN SOURCE select button
Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE popup window, in which you can select a keyin signal that will trigger the dynamics.
B KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for GATE or DUCKING)
Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass.
• Filter select buttons .................. Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To disable the filter, press the button that is turned on.
• Q knob......................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• FREQUENCY knob .................. Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
C KEY IN CUE button
Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE signal. Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature this button, or if you move to a different screen.
Reference Manual
6
7
8
9
0
DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (8ch)
This window displays the settings for eight channels, including the currently-selected channel. You can switch between eight-channel groups such as 1–8 and 9–16. Compared to the one-channel display, fewer parameters can be controlled. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right.
1 2 3 4 5
1
LIBRARY button
2
DEFAULT button
3
COPY button
4
PASTE button
5
COMPARE button
These buttons are the same as those on the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window.
6
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
7 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter
These meters indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears, indicating the open/close status of the gate.
Type = Any type other than GATE
Type = GATE
EQ and Dynamics
If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following:
Gate status
On/Off status
Open/Close status
Amount of gain reduction
Red
On
Close
Yellow
On
Open
30 dB or more less than 30 dB
Green
On
Open
0 dB
Off (dark)
Off
—
—
8
Dynamics graph
This graph displays the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window for that channel.
9
THRESHOLD knob
Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the corresponding multifunction knobs to adjust the value.
0 DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
Switches dynamics on or off.
61
Reference Manual
DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5),
CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT)
This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding channel.
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
EQ and Dynamics
3.
Access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch), and press the DYNAMICS ON button to enable the dynamics processor.
4.
To select a key-in signal, proceed as follows.
4-1. In the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch), press the KEY IN SOURCE button to access the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window.
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT pop-up window
8
1
LIBRARY button
2
DEFAULT button
3
COPY button
4
PASTE button
5
COMPARE button
These buttons are the same as those in the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window.
6 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number, threshold, and color appear on the button.
7 Dynamics parameter area
This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the DYNAMICS
1ch popup window of that channel.
If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area.
The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a vertical line.
8 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
62
4-2. Select the key-in signal. You can choose one of the following signals.
• SELF PRE EQ ............................. The pre-EQ signal of the same channel
• SELF POST EQ .......................... The post-EQ signal of the same channel
• MIX OUT 21–24 ....................... Output signals of MIX channels 21–24
• CH1–72 POST EQ, ST IN1L–8R POST EQ, MIX1–24 POST EQ,
MTRX1–8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ
........................... The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel
*1
*1. The selectable signals are limited to the corresponding eight-channel group.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4-3. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
5.
If you want to copy dynamics settings to another channel, or initialize the dynamics settings, use the tool buttons in the popup window.
NOTE
• Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings (see page 9
).
• Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.
Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings.
EQ library
There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels.
To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the
HPF/EQ popup window.
LIBRARY button
NOTE
• You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty
(40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are read-only presets.
• For details on how to access the HPF/EQ popup window, refer to “ Using EQ ” on page 56
.
Dynamics library
Use the “Dynamics Library” to store or recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics processors on CL series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will differ between an input channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel’s Dynamics 1. You cannot recall a type that cannot be selected.)
To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window.
NOTE
• You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only presets.
• For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window, refer to “
For details on using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
63
Reference Manual
Grouping and linking
This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move parameters between channels.
About DCA groups and Mute groups
CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups and eight mute groups that enable you to control the level of multiple channels simultaneously.
DCA groups enable you to assign input channels to sixteen groups, so that the Centralogic section faders 1–8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group. A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics, for example, can be grouped.
Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]–[16] to mute or unmute multiple channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously. Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channels can exist in the same group.
Using DCA groups
This section explains how to assign input channels to the sixteen DCA groups and use the faders in the
Centralogic section to control them.
Assigning channels to a DCA group
There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group.
• You can select a specific DCA group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be assigned.
NOTE
• DCA groups can be used only with input channels.
• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.
■ Selecting channels to belong to a specific DCA group
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
The CH JOB button lets you perform grouping, linking, and copying operations between channels.
When you press this button, the Function Access Area will change as follows.
DCA GROUP button
2.
Press the DCA GROUP button to access the
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
In the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window, if the DCA GROUP ASSIGN button has been selected, select the channels to be assigned to the DCA group. This popup window includes the following items.
1
Grouping and linking
2
3
4
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
2
DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window.
64
Reference Manual
3 DCA group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the
DCA group. The on-screen fader for that channel will turn yellow and the channel will be assigned to the DCA group. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group.
4 DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to assign.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If the [DCA 1–8] key or [DCA 9–16] key has been selected in the Centralogic section, you can access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the [SEL] key twice in rapid succession.
In this case, the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window will appear with the corresponding DCA GROUP 1–16 button selected for that DCA group.
3.
Use the DCA GROUP 1–16 buttons to select the DCA group to which you want to assign channels.
4.
Use the [SEL] keys of the input channels to select the input channels that you want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light, and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in yellow in the DCA group assign field of the window.
To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
5.
Assign channels to other DCA groups in the same way.
NOTE
You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders.
6.
When you finish making assignments, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window, and press the × symbol in the Function Access Area (CH JOB display).
You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle rows of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs.
4.
Select the DCA group(s) for other channels in the same way.
Grouping and linking
■ Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong
1.
Press a [SEL] key to select the input channel for which you want to make assignments.
2.
Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
On this screen you can view all mix parameters for the currently-selected channel.
3.
Use the DCA group select buttons to select the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple selections are allowed).
NOTE
You can also access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the
DCA/MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen.
65
Reference Manual
Controlling DCA groups
Use the faders in the Centralogic section to control DCA groups.
1.
Assign input channels to DCA groups.
2.
Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel, adjust the relative balance between the input channels that belong to the DCA group you want to use.
3.
In the Centralogic section, press the [DCA 1–8] or [DCA 9–16] Bank Select key to make it light so that you will be able to control the desired DCA groups in the
Centralogic section.
4.
Operate the Centralogic section fader corresponding to the DCA group that you want to use.
The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group will change while preserving the level differences you established in step 2.
NOTE
Operating a DCA fader will not cause the input faders to move in tandem.
5.
To switch a DCA group on/mute, press the [ON] key for that DCA group in the
Centralogic section.
When you press an [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator go dark, the channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same state as when the faders are lowered to the –∞ dB position).
6.
To cue-monitor a DCA group, press the [CUE] key for that DCA group in the
Centralogic section.
When you press the [CUE] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator light, the
[CUE] keys for the channels assigned to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be enabled. For more information about cue, refer to “
” on
.
NOTE
You can also press the [DCA], [DCA 1–8], or [DCA 9–16] key in the Channel Strip section to select the DCA group that you want to control.
Grouping and linking
Using mute groups
This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the USER DEFINED keys to control them.
Assigning channels to mute groups
As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups.
• You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be assigned.
■ Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
The Function Access Area will change as follows.
2.
Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
MUTE GROUP button
66
Reference Manual
4
6
7
2
3
In this popup window you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group. The popup window includes the following items.
1
5
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
2
DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window.
3 Mute group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the mute group. The on-screen fader for that channel will turn red and the channel will be assigned to the mute group. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group.
If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that are targets for mute safe (that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or from a mute group. The onscreen faders of the assigned channels will turn green.
4 Mute group select button
Selects the mute group that you want to assign.
5 MUTE SAFE button
Use this button if you want to exclude a specific channel from all mute groups, regardless of its assignment settings. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are excluded from the
mute groups. For more information on mute safe, “ Using the Mute Safe function
” on
67
Grouping and linking
6 MUTE GROUP MASTER button
Switches the corresponding mute group on or off.
7 DIMMER LEVEL knob
Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is enabled.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
MASTER button is turned on, this button will light orange.
3.
Use the MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels.
4.
Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to assign
(multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] keys for the assigned channels will light, and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in red in the mute group assign field of the window. To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
5.
Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way.
NOTE
You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group.
6.
When you finish making assignments, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window, and press the × symbol in the Function Access Area (CH JOB display).
You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower row of this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs.
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
MASTER button is turned on, these numbers will light orange.
For a channel for which the Mute Safe function (see
) has been turned on, an “S” indicator will light up green at the right end of the bottom row.
Reference Manual
■ Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong
1.
Press the [SEL] key for the input channel/output channel that you want to assign.
2.
Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
In this screen you can view the mix parameters for the currently-selected channel.
3.
Use the mute group select buttons to select the mute group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple selections are allowed).
Grouping and linking
Using mute groups
To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE GROUP
ASSIGN popup window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off function for a mute group 1–8 to a USER DEFINED key.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
4.
Select the mute group(s) for other channels in the same way.
2.
In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
This popup window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make systemwide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
68
Reference Manual
Grouping and linking
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[16].
USER DEFINED key popup button
4.
Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the
Mute On/Off function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear.
5.
Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION column, and choose “MUTE GROUP x”
(where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column.
Then, press the OK button.
To select an item in each column, use / buttons or the multifunction knobs. When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function for the specified mute group will be assigned to the
USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4, and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
6.
In the same way, assign the Mute On/Off function for another mute group to a different USER DEFINED key.
7.
When you finish assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys, press the × symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
9.
To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key [1]–[16] that has been assigned to the desired mute group.
The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] keys for the muted channels will blink. You can turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups.
10.
To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit in step
9.
NOTE
Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER
DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with.
69
Reference Manual
Using the Mute Safe function
Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations
(Mute Safe).
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
3.
Press the MUTE SAFE button.
4.
Press a [SEL] key to select the channel(s) that you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] key will light, and the corresponding channel in the mute group assign field of the window will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs.
Grouping and linking
Channel Link function
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input channels.
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• HPF settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 settings
• Dynamics 2 settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting
• DELAY setting
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN and MUTE SAFE settings
Two or more input channels that are linked are called a “link group.” There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number or combination of input channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types of parameters to be linked for each link group.
70
Reference Manual
1
2
3
Linking the desired input channels
This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels.
NOTE
Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the CH LINK button to open the CH LINK
MODE popup window.
In this popup window you can view the channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked. The window includes the following items.
NOTE
You can also access this window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked.
CH LINK button
71
Grouping and linking
1 Channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color.
NOTE
Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked.
2 LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to link. You can do this independently for each link group.
3 SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in the
LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3.
Use the buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field to select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
HA
HPF
DIGITAL GAIN
EQ
DYNAMICS 1, 2
INSERT
DIRECT OUT
MIX SEND
MIX ON
MATRIX SEND
MATRIX ON
FADER
DCA
CH ON
MUTE
TO STEREO
DELAY
Head amp settings
HPF settings
Digital gain settings
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
Insert settings
Direct Out settings
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
Fader operations
DCA group assignment
Channel on/off
Mute group assignment
On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses
Channel delay settings
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked,
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 button, library recall operations will also be linked.
• The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same relative level difference between the channels.
Reference Manual
Grouping and linking
4.
If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in step 3, use the buttons in the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
The table below lists the buttons you can select in the SEND PARAMETER field.
MIX 1–24
MATRIX 1–8
MIX buses 1–24
MATRIX buses 1–8
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, the send on/off and send level parameters will not be linked.
5.
To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel.
At this time, the values of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be copied from the link-source to the link-destination channel. Subsequent operations of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be linked between channels that belong to the same link group.
The current link status is displayed in the channel display field of the window.
NOTE
• If you want to link three or more channels, hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key for each channel you want to add to the link group.
• When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the
[SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored.
6.
If you want to add a new channel to an existing link group, hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to add to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another link group, the channel will be removed from the previous group and added to the newly assigned group.
7.
To remove a channel from a link group, hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove.
NOTE
You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. For example, this may be the case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader, or if you want to change the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group. While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value.
While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked.
(However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
You can also perform the operations from step 5 on screen.
5.
To link channels, press the channel display field.
The CH LINK SET popup window will appear.
6.
Select a channel that you want to link.
7.
To confirm the link, press the LINK button in the lower left of the screen.
An alphabetical character that indicates the link group will appear on the selected channel button.
NOTE
If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
8.
In the same way, link other channels as you wish.
9.
When you have finished linking channels, press the CLOSE button.
72
Reference Manual
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a channel
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu.
2.
Press the COPY button to access the CH COPY MODE popup window.
This popup window enables you to copy channel settings. The window contains the following items.
COPY button
Grouping and linking
1 SOURCE CH field
This field displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select a channel. The field will indicate the selected channel.
Before select ion Aft er select ion
If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy.
COPY TARGET field
• MODULE PARAMETERS button
Selected channel module parameters
• WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button
SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel
2 DESTINATION CHs field
This field displays the copy-destination channel. After you select the copy source, if you select a copy-destination channel by pressing its [SEL] key (multiple selections are allowed), this field will display the selected channel.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3
COPY button
Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copy-destination channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation.
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
1 4 2 3
73
Reference Manual
3.
To select the copy-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you choose the copy-source channel, the DESTINATION CHs field is automatically bolded, allowing you to select the copy-destination.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press the SOURCE CH field.
NOTE
Copy settings can be made only in the order of “copy-source” → “copy-destination.”
4.
To select the copy-destination channel(s), press the corresponding [SEL] key(s) to make it light (multiple selections are allowed).
The corresponding channel(s) are highlighted in the DESTINATION CHs field of the window.
The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3.
If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field.
5.
If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.
6.
To execute the copy, press the COPY button.
The copy will be executed, and the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination channel(s). After the copy has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will be empty.
7.
To close the CH COPY MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
Grouping and linking
Moving the parameters of a channel
The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you execute a
Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and move-destination will move forward or backward by one.
Move
1 2 3 4 5
1 5 2 3
Move by one.
4
You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between ST IN channels
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu.
2.
Press the MOVE button to access the CH MOVE
MODE popup window.
MOVE button
74
Reference Manual
1
This popup window lets you move channel settings.
2
3
4
1 SOURCE CH field
This field indicates the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel. This field will indicate the selected channel.
You can move settings between monaural input channels, or between ST IN channels.
2 DESTINATION CH field
This field indicates the move-destination channel. After you select the move source, if you select a move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key, this field will display the selected channel.
Grouping and linking
3 MOVE button
Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and move-destination channel, press this button to execute the move.
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
3.
To select the move-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you select the move-source channel, the DESTINATION CH field will automatically be bolded, allowing you to select the move-destination.
If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press the SOURCE CH field.
NOTE
Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order of “move-source” → “movedestination.”
4.
To select the move-destination channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DESTINATION CH field of the window. The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3.
If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the DESTINATION CH field.
5.
To execute the move, press the MOVE button.
The settings of all channels between the move-source and move-destination will shift toward the move-source by one channel, and the channel settings will move from the move-source to the move-destination. When the Move has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and
DESTINATION CH field will be empty.
6.
To close the CH MOVE MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
75
Reference Manual
Initializing the parameters of a channel
You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on any channel(s).
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu.
2.
Press the DEFAULT button to access the CH
DEFAULT MODE popup window.
This popup window enables you to initialize parameters.
Grouping and linking
3.
To select the channel(s) to be initialized, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light (multiple selections are allowed).
The corresponding channel(s) are highlighted in the TARGET CHs field of the window.
If you want to de-select all of the selected channels, press the TARGET CHs field.
4.
To execute the initialization, press the DEFAULT button.
The parameters of the selected channel(s) will be initialized.
After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected).
5.
To close the CH DEFAULT MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
DEFAULT button
1
2
3
1 TARGET CHs field
This field indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a
[SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel(s).
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 DEFAULT button
After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation.
3 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
76
Reference Manual
Scene memory
This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations.
About scene memories
On CL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory) as a “scene.”
Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000–300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001–300 are writable scenes.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the following parameters.
• Input/output port patching
• Channel name and color
• Bus settings
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
• Input delay settings
• Rack (GEQ/effect/Premium Rack) settings
• Pan/balance settings
• Insert/Direct Out settings
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Settings for signals sent to the STEREO/MONO bus
• DCA group settings
• Mute group settings
• Channel link settings
• Panel assignment status (PANEL SNAPSHOT)
Scene memory
Using scene memories
Storing and recalling scenes
To store the current mix settings as a scene in memory and recall it later, you can use the keys in the
SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section on the top panel, or you can use the SCENE LIST window.
■ Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
1.
Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired.
2.
Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the store-destination scene number.
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. When you select a new scene number, the number will blink.
This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number is different from the currently-loaded scene number.
1 2 2
4
3
This field always displays general information about the scene. You can press this field to access the SCENE LIST window, in which you can view and edit additional settings for the scene.
1
Scene number
Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene.
2
R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here. Write-protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol.
3 Scene title
Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene.
4 E symbol (EDIT symbol)
This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene.
This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes you made.
77
Reference Manual
NOTE
• If you press and hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys, the scene number will count up or down continuously.
• If you press the SCENE MEMORY [INC] and [DEC] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field indication will return to the number of the currently-loaded scene.
• You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed.
3.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.
The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene.
1 2
1 SCENE TITLE field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters).
2 COMMENT field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters).
4.
Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
Scene memory
5.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key or the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE popup window.
The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation.
6.
To execute the Store operation, press the OK button.
The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 2. When the Store operation is complete, the scene number in the Function Access Area will stop blinking. If you want to cancel the Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear (see
page 168 ). In this case, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the
SCENE STORE popup window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation. Alternatively, you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice to store without seeing the SCENE STORE popup window.
7.
To recall a stored scene, use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall.
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function Access
Area.
8.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
9.
To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button.
The scene you selected in step 7 will be recalled. If you want to cancel the Recall operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
78
Reference Manual
2
5
4
3
6
■ Using the SCENE LIST window
1.
Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired.
2.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various scene-related operations. The window includes the following items.
1 E
7
8
90 A B C D
1 Scene list
This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory.
2 NO./TITLE buttons
Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order.
3 Scene number
Indicates the current scene number.
4 Scene title
Indicates the scene title. Press this title to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window, in which you can edit the title.
Scene memory
5 Write-protect
Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection.
6 Current scene
The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list. If you press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will become the current scene.
7 SCENE SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knobs to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob.
8 MULTI SELECT button
You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the multifunction knob. If this button is off, you can still select consecutive multiple scenes by rotating the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
9 LAST SCENE button
Press this button to select the scene that was recalled most recently.
0 SCENE STORE popup button
This button stores the current mix settings. Press this button to display the SCENE STORE popup window, which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it.
A STORE UNDO button
Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an
Overwrite-store operation.
B RECALL SCENE button
Recalls the currently-selected scene.
C RECALL UNDO button
Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a Recall operation.
D Page switching tabs
Switch views on the right side of the scene list.
E PREVIEW button
Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene.
79
Reference Manual
3.
To store a scene, rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the storedestination scene number.
NOTE
• You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI
SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
• If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the same mix settings.
• You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select scene numbers.
4.
Press the STORE button.
The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene.
5.
Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
6.
Press the STORE button located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE popup window.
The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation.
7.
To execute the Store operation, press the OK button.
The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 3. If you want to cancel the Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
8.
If you want to cancel the overwrite-store operation that you just performed, press the STORE UNDO button.
Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can use the STORE UNDO button to undo
(cancel) the scene store operation that was executed most recently. When you press the STORE
UNDO button, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. Press the OK button if you want to execute the Undo operation. After executing the Undo operation, you can press the
STORE UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute) the Store operation.
NOTE
• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing.
• You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
(see
9.
To recall a scene, rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store-source scene number.
10.
Press the RECALL button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
11.
To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button.
The scene you selected in step 9 will be recalled. If you want to cancel the Recall operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
80
Scene memory
12.
If you want to cancel the Recall operation that you just performed, press the
RECALL UNDO button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. Press the OK button if you want to execute the operation. After undoing the recall, you can press the RECALL UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute).
NOTE
• You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
(see
).
• You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes (see
).
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall
You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a USER DEFINED key.
The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key.
• INC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene for the number that follows the currently-loaded scene.
• DEC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene for the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene.
NOTE
If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled.
• DIRECT RECALL
Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be recalled immediately.
To assign one of these functions to a USER DEFINED key so that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke, proceed as follows.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
Reference Manual
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[16].
Scene memory
5.
In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.”
Proceed as follows, depending on the function you want to assign.
• To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column.
• To assign DIRECT RECALL
Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
6.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the popup window.
If desired, assign scene-recall functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way.
7.
Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function.
The corresponding scene will be recalled.
4.
Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear.
81
Reference Manual
Editing scene memories
This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy and paste them.
Sorting scene memories
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations related to scene memory. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right half of the SCENE LIST window between five different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/GPI OUT/PLAYBACK LINK).
2.
Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The COMMENT field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
1 4
Scene memory
1 COMMENT sort button
Sorts scenes in alphabetical order of the comments in the COMMENT field. Each time you press this button, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order.
2 COMMENT field
Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT popup window, in which you can enter comments for the scene.
3 STATUS field
Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK
(playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.)
4 TIME STAMP sort button
Sorts scenes in chronological order based on the date and time in the TIME STAMP field. Each time you press this button, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order.
5 TIME STAMP field
Indicates the date and time the scene was stored.
For details on the TIME STAMP display format, refer to “
Setting the date and time of the internal clock ” on page 204 .
6 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes made here are immediately reflected on the CL series console.
3.
To select a scene number, rotate one of the multifunction knobs on the top panel.
The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates the scene currently selected for operations.
4.
To sort the list, press one of the column headers “NO.”, “TITLE,” “COMMENT,” or
“TIME STAMP” at the top of the scene list and COMMENT field.
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column title you press.
1 2 3 4
5
3
2
6
1
NO.
Sorts the list in order of scene number.
2
TITLE
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of title.
3
COMMENT
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of comments.
82
Reference Manual
4 TIME STAMP
Sorts the list in order of date of creation.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or descending).
5.
If you want to edit the title or comment of a scene, press the TITLE field or
COMMENT field of the scene to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT or SCENE COMMENT
EDIT popup window.
NOTE
You cannot edit the title or comment of a read-only scene or a write-protected scene.
6.
To enable/disable the protect setting, press the protect symbol.
A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected scenes. These scenes cannot be overwritten.
NOTE
The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.
7.
Use the tool buttons to edit the scene memory.
For details, refer to the section “Scene memory editing” that follows.
Scene memory editing
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or cleared
(erased).
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory. You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of the SCENE
LIST window.
The function of each button is described below.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Scene memory
4 CUT button
Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented by one.
5 INSERT button
Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene number. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one.
6 UNDO button
Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores the previous state.
2.
Perform the desired editing operation.
For more information about the procedure, refer to the corresponding explanations that follow.
Copying and pasting a scene
You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number.
NOTE
The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (see
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the copy-source scene number, and then press the COPY button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.
1 COPY button
Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory.
2 PASTE button
Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory.
3 CLEAR button
Press this button to erase the selected scene.
3.
To execute the copy, press the OK button.
The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in buffer memory.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
• You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source.
83
Reference Manual
4.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the paste-destination scene number, and then press the PASTE button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste operation.
NOTE
• You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes.
• A copied scene can also be inserted (see page 85 ).
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable.
5.
To execute the paste operation, press the OK button.
The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted to the scene number you selected in step 4.
If you want to cancel the Paste operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
Clearing a scene
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to clear, and then press the CLEAR button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
Scene memory
Cutting a scene
This section explains how to cut a scene.
When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location.
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to cut, and then press the CUT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut operation.
NOTE
If the scene list has been sorted in any other way than by number (in the “NO.” column), the CUT button will be unavailable.
3.
To execute the Cut operation, press the OK button.
The scene(s) you selected in step 2 will be cut, and the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. At this time, the scene that was cut will be stored in buffer memory.
NOTE
Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
4.
If desired, you can paste (see page 83 ) or insert the cut scene (that was held in the
buffer memory).
NOTE
Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
NOTE
You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
3.
To execute the Clear operation, press the OK button.
The scene number(s) you selected in step 2 will be cleared. If you want to cancel the Clear operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared.
84
Reference Manual
Inserting a scene
You can insert a scene held in buffer memory at a desired scene number location.
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2.
Perform the Copy operation (see
) or Cut operation so that the scene you want to insert is placed in buffer memory.
NOTE
You cannot copy or cut multiple scenes as the source.
3.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the insert-destination scene number, and then press the INSERT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert operation.
Scene memory
Using the Global Paste function
“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed). This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to multiple scenes that have already been stored.
NOTE
The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window.
2.
Press the GLOBAL PASTE button located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window to open the GLOBAL PASTE window.
This window enables you to select the copy-source channels/parameters and specify the pastedestination scene number.
NOTE
• If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the selected number of times.
• If the scene list has been sorted in any way other than by number (in the “NO.” column), the
INSERT button will be unavailable.
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the INSERT button will be unavailable.
• The INSERT button will be unavailable if there is already a scene stored at scene number 300, or if the Insert operation would cause an already-stored scene to exceed number 300.
4.
To execute the Insert operation, press the OK button.
The scene stored in buffer memory will be inserted at the scene number you selected in step 3. If you selected multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted multiple times starting at the scene number you selected.
Scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted.
1
2
85
1 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
2 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all channels simultaneously.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
Reference Manual
3.
Use the tabs to select one of the following as the type of item you want to copy.
INPUT
OUTPUT
RACK
PATCH/NAME
DCA
Input channel and its parameters
Output channel and its parameters
GEQ/effect/Premium rack
Input/output patch, channel name
DCA group
4.
Select the copy-source channel or parameter.
The view will vary depending on the tab you select.
You cannot select different parameters from different channels.
To select a channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key on the top panel.
• INPUT tab
Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
ALL
INPUT PATCH
NAME
HA
DELAY
HPF
DIGITAL GAIN
EQ
DYNA 1
DYNA 2
MIX SEND
MATRIX SEND
FADER
CH ON
INSERT
INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT
MIX ON
MATRIX ON
TO ST
MONO
All input channel parameters
Input patch settings
Channel name, icon, and channel color
Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel, and phase
Input delay settings
HPF settings
Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
Fader level
On/off status of [ON] keys
Insert on/off status and insert point
Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings
Send on/off to a MIX bus
Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
TO ST on/off status, pan/balance settings
TO MONO on/off status
• OUTPUT tab
Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
ALL
OUTPUT PATCH
NAME
EQ
All output channel parameters
Output patch settings
Channel name, icon, and channel color
EQ settings
86
Scene memory
DYNA 1
INSERT
INSERT PATCH
FADER
CH ON
TO ST/BAL
MONO
MATRIX SEND
MATRIX ON
WITH SEND FROM
SOURCE CHs
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
Insert on/off status and insert point
Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
Fader level
On/off status of [ON] keys
TO ST on/off status, pan/balance settings
TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1-24 only)
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel
• RACK tab
Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can individually select an GEQ for a Flex15GEQ or an effect used in dual mode.
• PATCH/NAME tab
You can select the following parameters.
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT NAME
OUTPUT NAME
HA
CH LINK
All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches
All output channel patches, insert in/out patches
Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels
Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels
Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation, phase settings
Channel link settings
• DCA tab
You can select either ALL or LEVEL/ON. If ALL is selected, all parameters will be copied. If
LEVEL/ON is selected, the master level and DCA channel on/off status will be copied. You can select copy-source items for each DCA group 1–16 individually.
5.
In the DESTINATION SCENE area, select the range of paste-destination scenes.
Scenes specified between FROM and TO (inclusive) become the paste destination. Use multifunction knob 7 to specify the FROM value, and multifunction knob 8 to specify the TO value.
6.
Press the PASTE button.
The selected items of the current scene will be pasted to the scene(s) in memory.
A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted.
During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to abort the operation. In that case, part of data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo the operation.
Reference Manual
Using the Focus function
“Focus” is a function that lets you specify the scene parameters that will be recalled (loaded) when you recall a scene. You can specify these settings for each scene. This function is useful if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a specific scene.
NOTE
In contrast to Focus, the CL series console features a “Recall Safe” function that enables you to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However while the Focus function is specified for each scene, Recall Safe settings are applied to all scenes.
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory.
2.
Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The FOCUS field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
1 2
Scene memory
3 FOCUS PARAMETER indicators
These indicators show the focus recall settings that are specified for each scene.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Here you can specify the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
3.
Press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
The FOCUS RECALL popup window will appear. The window contains the following items.
1
2
3
3
4
1
FOCUS button
Enables or disables the Focus function for each scene.
2
SET popup button
Press this button to access the FOCUS RECALL popup screen, which allows you to select the parameters that will be subject to recall.
87
1
CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
Turns off (or on) all focus channel selections and global focus parameter settings.
■ Focus channel display field
Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as that in the
RECALL SAFE popup window.
To add channels as the target, turn the SET BY SEL button
2
on, and then press the corresponding
[SEL] keys for the desired channels.
2 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. When you press the
[SEL] key of a channel, the on-screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green (all parameters will be recalled) or blue (only some parameters will be recalled). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
Reference Manual
■ Channel focus parameter display field
Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE popup window.
3 FOCUS button
Switches the Focus Recall function on or off.
■ GLOBAL FOCUS PARAMETER field
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window.
4.
Follow the procedure starting with step 2 in the “Using the Recall Safe function” section to make settings.
5.
If you want only specific parameters to be recalled for the selected channel or DCA group, use the buttons other than ALL in the channel focus parameter display field to select the parameters that will be recalled (multiple selections are allowed). If you want all parameters to be recalled, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting).
If the ALL button is on, all other buttons for that scene will be turned off. Turning on any other button will turn off the ALL button.
6.
Recall a scene for which you have made Focus settings.
Only the channels (DCA groups) / parameters selected in the FOCUS RECALL popup window will be recalled. Bus settings will always reproduce the state of the recalled scene, regardless of the
Focus Recall settings.
NOTE
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are marked by a “FOCUS” indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab).
• You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled.
Scene memory
Using the Recall Safe function
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from Recall operations. Unlike the Focus settings (see
page 87 ), which you can apply to individual scenes, the Recall
Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB popup window.
2.
Press the RECALL SAFE button to access the
RECALL SAFE MODE popup window.
RECALL SAFE button
In this popup window, you can make settings for the
Recall Safe function. The window contains the following items.
2 1 4
3
5
6
9
7 8
1
CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously.
NOTE
The selection of parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change.
88
Reference Manual
Scene memory
2 CH RECALL SAFE field
Indicates the channels currently specified for the Recall Safe function.
3 SET BY SEL button
Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by the Recall
Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. The on-screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green (all parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function), or turn blue (some parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels.
4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field
Indicates the state of Recall Safe settings that are not made in units of channels, and the Recall Safe settings for racks. Press this field to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window.
5
Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6 Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input channels.
8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)
Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to all other output channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output channels.
9 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (excluding DCA groups)
Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel.
The button indication varies depending on the channel type, as follows:
• Input channel
NOTE
ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, or DIRECT OUT button.
• MIX channel
• MATRIX channel
• STEREO channel
• MONO channel
If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the selected channel will light green, as follows.
89
In this illustration, the items that are lit green indicate that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings.
In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, OUTPUT
NAME , and HA will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light green.
Reference Manual
On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following channels:
Button name Corresponding parameter
Input channel
MIX channel
MATRIX channel
STEREO/
MONO channel
WITH MIX SEND Send level to the MIX bus
WITH MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus
ALL
HA
HPF
EQ
All parameters
HA-related settings
HPF settings
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 settings DYNA 1
DYNA 2
MIX SEND
MATRIX SEND
FADER
CH ON
Dynamics 2 settings
Send level to MIX bus
Send level to MATRIX bus
Fader settings
TO ST
[ON] key settings
On/off setting for STEREO bus assignment, PAN, etc.
MONO
On/off setting for MONO bus assignment
INPUT PATCH
DIGITAL GAIN
Input Patching
Digital gain settings
INSERT Insert on/off
Insert patch settings INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT
MIX ON
MATRIX ON
DELAY
NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
Direct Out settings
MIX Send On/Off
MATRIX Send On/Off
Delay settings
Channel name
Output Patching
BAL BLANCE parameter settings
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
*1
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(stereo only)
*1. ST IN channels do not feature these buttons.
0
SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (DCA)
Enables you to select parameters for a DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations.
If the ALL button is on, all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on, the DCA master level and on/off status will be subject to Recall Safe.
90
Scene memory
3.
To select the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations, press the corresponding [SEL] key.
The corresponding channel or DCA group will be enclosed by a white frame in the CH RECALL
SAFE field. (However, this white frame does not mean that the Recall Safe setting is now enabled.)
The selected channel or DCA groups 1–8 or 9–16 will be recalled to the SAFE PARAMETER
SELECT field.
NOTE
If the CH RECALL SAFE field’s SET BY SEL button is on, Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the [SEL] key, and the corresponding channel or DCA group will be highlighted in the CH
RECALL SAFE field. You can select parameters as described in step 4 even after turning Recall
Safe on.
4.
If you want to enable Recall Safe for specific parameters of the selected channel or
DCA group, make the following settings in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field.
NOTE
• Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off,
you must also perform the operation described in step 5 (see page 91 ).
• While the APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (or the APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button) is on, operations in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will apply to all input channels (or output channels).
• If an input channel is selected:
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL” button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are allowed). If you want all parameters to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting).
• If a ST IN channel is selected:
Use the same steps as those for an input channel. (Different buttons will be displayed.)
• If a MIX channel is selected:
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL” button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are allowed).
In addition, you can use the WITH MIX SEND button displayed in the lower left of the field to enable
Recall Safe for the on/off status and send level of signals sent from input channels to MIX buses.
If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the field to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting).
• If a MATRIX channel is selected:
Use the same steps as those for a MIX channel. (Different types of buttons will be displayed.)
• If a DCA group is selected:
If you press a [SEL] key for a DCA group, all parameters for the DCA groups (selected from DCA groups 1–8 and DCA groups 9–16) will be displayed simultaneously. For the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe, you can select either “ALL” or “LEVEL/ON” (fader position and on/off status of the [ON] key). Recall Safe will be enabled when you make this selection.
If you want all parameters of the DCA group to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button.
Unlike when a channel is selected, Recall Safe will be enabled for that DCA group the moment you turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.
Reference Manual
5.
To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE
PARAMETER SELECT field. (If you have selected a DCA group, turn on either the
LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.)
Channels or DCA groups for which Recall Safe is enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL
SAFE field.
6.
To turn on Recall Safe for global parameters, press the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field to access the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window, and turn on the appropriate buttons.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
INPUT PATCH
INPUT NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT NAME
HA
CH LINK
GEQ RACK
EFFECT RACK
PREMIUM RACK
PANEL SNAPSHOT
All input channel patching (including INSERT IN/OUT and DIRECT OUT patching)
All input channel names, icons, and channel colors
All output channel patching (including INSERT IN/OUT patching)
All output channel names, icons, and channel colors
All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external head amps
All channel link group settings
Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1–16, Effect racks 1–8, Premium Racks
1–8 individually.
Fader bank selections, GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob selection status (set in units of blocks)
NOTE
If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium Rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack
A and B individually. For other racks, the Recall Safe setting for racks A and B will be linked.
7.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. Then perform a Recall operation.
Only the selected DCA group channels and parameters will be excluded from Recall operations.
Bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe. They will always be reproduced in the recalled scene.
This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the next time it is operated.
You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter.
NOTE
• You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus function (see page 87 ). Channels or
parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled.
• If you hold down the [SEL] key while performing a recall operation, all parameters of that channel will be treated as Recall Safe regardless of the state of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT selections.
Using the Fade function
Scene memory
“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene.
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory.
2.
Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The FADE TIME field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
2
1
3
4
91
1
SET popup button
Press this button to open the FADE TIME popup window, in which you can select a channel for which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time over which the fader will reach its new value).
2
FADER button
Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene.
Reference Manual
3 FADE TIME display
This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
3.
Press the SET button to access the FADE TIME popup window.
In this popup window you can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time.
1 3 4
2
1
Channel display field
The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted.
2
FADE TIME knob
Sets the fade time. You can adjust the fade time using the corresponding multifunction knob.
3
SET ALL button
Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene.
4
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to cancel the Fade effect for all faders of that scene.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
Scene memory
4.
Press the [SEL] keys for the desired channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] keys for the selected channels or DCA groups will light, and those channels or DCA groups will be highlighted green in the channel display field of the popup window. You can cancel the selection by pressing the lit [SEL] key once again to turn it off.
5.
Use the multifunction knob that corresponds to the FADE TIME knob to adjust the fade time.
The range is 0.0 sec – 60.0 sec.
When you have finished setting the fade time, press the OK button to close the FADE TIME popup window.
NOTE
The fade time you specify here is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in step 4.
6.
To enable the Fade function, press the FADE button.
You can turn the Fade function on or off individually for each scene.
NOTE
Scenes for which Fade settings are made are marked by a “FADE” indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab).
7.
Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on.
The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time.
NOTE
• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link.
• You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving fader.
• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups will move immediately to their target positions.
92
Reference Manual
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
A contol signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows.
NOTE
For more information on the GPI OUT settings, refer to “ Using GPI OUT ” on page 223 .
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory.
Scene memory
1 GPI OUT CONTROL buttons
These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT.
Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions.
• –––– (OFF) ................ Nothing will be output.
• TRIGGER .................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled.
• TALLY ........................ A tally will be output when the scene is recalled.
2 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
3.
For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT port.
4.
Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals.
When you recall the scene, the control signals will be output to the external device connected to the GPI OUT connector.
2.
Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The GPI OUT field will appear.
1
2
93
Reference Manual
The PLAYBACK LINK field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
Scene memory
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall
You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be played automatically in a specific scene.
Follow the steps below to link a scene recall with audio file playback.
NOTE
• Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\.
• You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode.
• A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings.
• Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified file may become unrecognizable in rare cases.
1.
Connect a USB flash drive containing the audio files to the USB connector.
2.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations related to scene memory.
3.
Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
1
2
3
4
1 PLAY button
Sets the Playback Link function’s on/off status for each scene.
2 Song select popup button
Press this button to open the SONG SELECT popup window, in which you can select a song and set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the title of the selected song will appear on the button.
3
Offset time display
Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified audio file.
Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT popup window.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
94
Reference Manual
4.
Press the song select popup button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file. The SONG SELECT popup window will appear.
1
4
5
6
8
In this popup window, you can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time.
2 3
7
1 Change directory button
Press this button to move to the next higher level.
NOTE
You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
2 PATH indicator
This area indicates the current directory path.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons
Switch between the song title list and the file name list.
4 SONG TITLE list button
5 ARTIST list button
Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title and artist name respectively.
6 Song list
Displays the title, artist name, and audio file time duration of the audio files in the \YPE\SONGS\ folder. You can select an audio file by pressing the audio file name.
Scene memory
7 OFFSET knob
You can use the multifunction knob to set the time duration from scene recall until the start of audio file playback.
8 Scroll knob
Use the multifunction to scroll the list.
5.
Press the screen or use the multifunction knobs to select a file that you want to link to a scene.
6.
If desired, use the corresponding multifunction knobs to set the offset (the time duration until the start of audio file playback).
The offset value can be adjusted in the range of 0.0–99.0 in 0.5 sec steps.
7.
Press the OK button.
The title of the selected song will appear in the center of the song list.
If you select the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, your settings will be discarded and the unit will return to the SCENE LIST popup window.
8.
Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file.
The PLAY button will light in the LINK field. The PLAY indicator will appear in the STATUS field on the COMMENT tab.
9.
Repeat steps 4–8 to link audio files to other scenes.
10.
Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.
After the offset time duration has elapsed, the specified audio file will play one time.
NOTE
• After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in the Function Access Area.
• If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is recalled, regardless of the offset time setting.
95
Reference Manual
Using Preview mode
Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the CL series console, but the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall.
During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it.
1.
Press the PREVIEW button on the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
The PREVIEW button will light, and the console will be in Preview mode.
In this state, operating controllers such as the knobs and faders will not affect the signal processing of the current scene.
2.
Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall.
3.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. To execute the Recall operation, press the
OK button.
The scene will be recalled. However, the internal signal processing of the current scene will remain unchanged as it was prior to the Recall operation.
If desired, you can access a specific channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, or access a specific screen in the display to examine the values in detail.
4.
If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings.
Operating a panel control in Preview mode will edit the settings of the scene you recalled in step
3, but will not affect the signal processing of the current scene.
5.
If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.
The settings you edited in step 4 will be stored into memory.
6.
When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the
PREVIEW button of the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
The PREVIEW button will go dark; the CL series console will exit Preview mode and return to the normal state.
NOTE
PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters.
Scene memory
Functions in Preview mode
The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations.
• CL Editor
• Stage Mix
• MIDI Rx
• GPI IN
Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external devices.
• CL Editor
• Stage Mix
• MIDI Tx
• GPI OUT
The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.
Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene.
If cascade-connected, both master and slave units will operate independently. Link will not occur while in Preview mode.
The following functions will not operate in Preview mode.
• Synchronization with CL Editor
• Switching users
• Changing the User Level
• Load/Save functions
• Cue changes
• USER DEFINED KEYS operations
• USER DEFINED KNOB operations
• Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display
• Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings
• Changing or viewing the recorder
• Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings
• FADE TIME
• EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording
• MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects
• Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt-2A and
U76)
In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations.
• While pasting scene or EQ settings.
• While executing Global Paste
• While synchronizing with CL Editor
• While saving/loading a file
96
Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
This chapter explains the Monitor and Cue functions of CL series consoles.
About the Monitor and Cue functions
The Monitor function lets you audition various outputs through your nearfield monitors or headphones. On the front panel of the CL series console is a PHONES Out jack for monitoring, which enables you to monitor the monitoring source signal at any time. By assigning the MONITOR OUT L/
R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers.
You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
• STEREO channel output signal
• MONO channel output signal
• STEREO + MONO channel output signal
• OMNI IN 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8 channel input signal (for monitoring a two channnel pair)
• RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal
• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output signals,
RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and OMNI IN 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8 input signals
The Cue function enables you to check an individual channel or DCA group by temporarily monitoring it via MONITOR OUT, CUE OUT, or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output or cue output from the selected output port.
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES Out jack.
The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.
CUE L BUS
CUE R BUS
OMNI IN 1/2
OMNI IN 3/4
OMNI IN 5/6
OMNI IN 7/8
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
OMNI IN 3/4
OMNI IN 5/6
OMNI IN 7/8
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
MIX OUT1-24
MATRIX OUT1-8
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX:8ch)
CUE TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
CUE L
CUE R
MONO
METER CUE L
METER CUE R
CUE OUT ON
CUE ON
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS
CUE OUT L
CUE OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE LOGIC
CUE OUT
LEVEL
PHONES
LEVEL LINK DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONO
MONITOR L
MONITOR R
MONITOR MONO(C)
METER MONITOR L
METER MONITOR R
METER MONITOR MONO(C)
CUE INTERRUPTION
ON
TALKBACK ON
MONITOR DIMM ON
MONITOR
LEVEL
MONITOR
FADER
ON
+MONO(C)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
PHONES L
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
To PHONES OUT
MONITOR OUT L
MONITOR OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MONITOR OUT MONO(C)
To OUTPUT PATCH
97
Monitor and Cue functions
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the monitor source.
• METER
Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal.
• DIMMER
Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.
• MONITOR LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
• MONITOR FADER
Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with MONITOR
LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
• ON (on/off)
Switches the Monitor function on or off.
• DELAY (Monitor delay)
Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output.
• PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Adjusts the output level at the PHONES Out jack.
• PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function)
If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack.
• CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function)
If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on.
Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers or headphones.
Reference Manual
Using the Monitor function
This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers.
1.
Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on the rear panel.
Monitor signals can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel. To monitor through headphones, make sure that your headphones are connected to the PHONES Out jack on the front pad.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and turn monitoring on or off.
The MONITOR screen contains the following items.
2 3 4 5
1
6
7
8
1 MONITOR popup display button
Enables you to access the MONITOR popup window, in which you can make detailed monitor settings.
Monitor and Cue functions
2 SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the MONITOR popup window to specify the source channel.
3 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
4 MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust the level.
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader. Indicator assignments are as follows:
• ---- ................................................ No assignment
• MASTER A................................. Master A only
• MASTER A+ .............................. Master A, Master B, Custom Fader bank
• MASTER B ................................. Master B only
• MASTER B+............................... Master B, Custom fader bank
• CUSTOM .................................... A single fader in the Custom fader bank
• CUSTOMs .................................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank
5 Meter field
Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open the
MONITOR popup window.
6 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches Monitor Out on or off.
7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob or MONITOR FADER will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack.
8 MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono.
98
Reference Manual
3.
Press the popup button or the meter field to open the MONITOR popup window.
In the MONITOR popup window you can make detailed settings for monitoring. The popup window includes the following items.
3 5 6 7
1
2
4
9 0
8
A
1
SOURCE SELECT field
Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
STEREO L/R
MONO (C)
STEREO L/R channel signals
MONO channel signal
LCR STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals
OMNI 1–2 – 7–8 OMNI IN jacks 1–8 signals (per two channels)
PB OUT
DEFINE
Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field
2 ASSIGN field
If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, use this field to specify the monitor source.
You can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously. Pressing the CLEAR ALL button will clear all selections.
3 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on.
99
Monitor and Cue functions
• DIMMER ON button
Switches the Dimmer function on or off. The monitor signal will be attenuated if this button is on.
4 TALKBACK DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals when TALKBACK is on.
• TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which monitor signals will be attenuated when talkback is on.
• TALKBACK DIMMER ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the dimmer function for talkback.
5 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level. If this button is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob and monitor fader knob will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
6 CUE INTERRUPTION button
Press this button to interrupt the cue signal with the monitor signal. If this button is on and the cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue signal to the monitor output, switch this button off.
7 MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono.
8 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches the monitor output on or off.
9 MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level.
• FADER ASSIGN indicator
This area displays the faders that are currently assigned as MONITOR FADER. Indicator assignments are as follows:
----
MASTER A
MASTER A+
MASTER B
MASTER B+
CUSTOM
CUSTOMs
No assignment
MASTER A fader only
MASTER A, as well as MASTER B fader and Custom fader bank
MASTER B fader only
MASTER B, as well as Custom fader bank
One of the Custom fader bank faders
Multiple Custom fader bank faders
Reference Manual
0 MONITOR DELAY field
This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is delayed.
• AUTO BYPASS button
Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on.
• MONITOR DELAY knob
Adjusts the delay time for the monitor signal. The delay time is shown above the knob in ms units, and below the knob in units of the currently selected scale. However if the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob.
Press this knob and you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the value.
• MONITOR DELAY ON button
If this button is on, the monitor signal will be delayed according to the setting of the MONITOR
DELAY knob.
A Meter field
• Meters
Indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels.
• MONITOR OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the monitor out L/R/C channels.
4.
Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT field to select a monitor source.
In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only one monitor source. However, if you have selected DEFINE, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources.
The following table shows the monitor sources that you can select in the ASSIGN field.
MIX 1–24
MTRX 1–8
STEREO
MONO (C)
OMNI 1–2 – OMNI 7–8
PB OUT
Output signals of MIX channels 1–24
MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals
STEREO L/R channel output signals
MONO channel output signal
OMNI IN jacks 1–8 input signals (per two channels)
Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
NOTE
You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Please turn off the buttons for unneeded sources.
Monitor and Cue functions
5.
To specify a port as the output destination for monitor signals L, C, and R, press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to open the
PORT SELECT popup window. In this window, choose from the following monitor signal output destinations (multiple selections are allowed).
DANTE 1–64
OMNI1–8
DIGI OUT L/R
SLOT1–1 – SLOT3–16
Output channels 1–64 to audio network
OMNI OUT jacks 1–8
DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit
Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–3
When you have selected an output port, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
In the same way, specify the output ports for MONITOR OUT L, R, and C.
NOTE
• If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R to monitor through two speakers.
• If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or
LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.
6.
To enable monitoring, press the OUTPUT button to turn it on.
The monitor source you selected in step 4 will be sent to the output destination you specified in step 5.
NOTE
The PHONES Out jack will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off.
7.
To control the monitor fader, press the Bank Select [STEREO] key in the Centralogic section, and then operate the monitor fader.
100
Reference Manual
8.
To adjust the monitor level, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE
MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader, as well as the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones.
9.
Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, Monaural, and CUE INTERRUPTION as desired.
NOTE
Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also be assigned to USER DEFINED keys (see
Monitor and Cue functions
Using the Cue function
About CUE groups
Cue signals on the CL series console can be categorized into the following four groups.
1 INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the
[CUE] key for any input channel to turn Cue on.
Input channel [CUE] key
NOTE
If input channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the
[CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group.
2
DCA CUE group
The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE] key of one of the DCA groups to turn Cue on.
Centralogic section [CUE] key
(when controlling DCA groups)
101
3
OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the
[CUE] key of one of the output channels.
[CUE] key in the Master section
Reference Manual
[CUE] key in the Centralogic section
(when controlling MIX channels or MATRIX channels)
Monitor and Cue functions
Operating the Cue function
This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue signals.
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the front panel PHONES jack will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See “
Using the Monitor function ” on page 98 for details about the Monitor function.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen.
The CUE field on the MONITOR screen enables you to check the current cue settings, and turn
Cue on or off.
2 3
4 Other CUE group
These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE button in the
EFFECT popup window or the PREMIUM popup window, or if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 popup window. This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding popup window.
On-screen CUE button
You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated.
However, if you have switched the cue signal group in a specific order when the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE, the state of the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be restored when the current cue signal is defeated.
The following illustration shows the priority of the [CUE] keys. After you have switched groups from lower to upper levels, if you then defeat cue for the upper group, the previous [CUE] key status of the group immediately below will be restored.
Other CUE group
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
For example, if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group → DCA
CUE group → INPUT CUE group →
OUTPUT CUE group
Other CUE group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys
(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previouslyselected group.
1
4
5
102
1 CUE popup display button
Enables you to access the CUE popup window, in which you can make detailed cue settings.
2 CUE MODE buttons
Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued), or LAST
CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued).
3
INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field
Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open the CUE popup window.
Reference Manual
4 CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue out on or off.
5 CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE, all of the selected channels will be cleared.
2.
Press the CUE popup display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field to open the CUE popup window.
The popup window includes the following items.
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
9
1 CUE MODE buttons
Select one of the following two cue modes:
• MIX CUE
All selected channels will be mixed and auditioned.
• LAST CUE
Only the most recently selected channel will be auditioned.
2 INPUT CUE field
This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue.
• Cue point select button
Sets the cue point to PFL (before fader (immediately before INPUT DELAY)), AFL (immediately after fader), or POST PAN (immediately after PAN).
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode.
• PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
Monitor and Cue functions
3 DCA CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue.
• Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST PAN
(immediately after PAN).
• DCA TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
• UNITY button
Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when the master level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain).
4 OUTPUT CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue.
• Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL (immediately after fader).
• PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
5 Meter field
• Meter
This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels.
• CUE OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the cue out L/R channels.
6 CUE OUTPUT button
Switches cue out on or off.
7 CUE LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the cue out. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
8 ACTIVE CUE indicator
Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow, output: orange).
9 CLEAR CUE button
Press this button to clear all cue selections simultaneously.
103
Reference Manual
3.
Use the CUE MODE button to select either the mode in which channels are mixed for auditioning, or the mode in which only the last-selected channel is auditioned.
Select the MIX CUE button or LAST CUE button.
NOTE
In MIX CUE mode, it’s not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue for different Cue groups. The
Cue group to which the last-cued signal belongs will be turned on, allowing only the signals of that Cue group to be monitored.
4.
Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE field, DCA CUE field, and OUTPUT
CUE field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE group.
Refer to the explanation for each item in step 2, and make the desired settings.
5.
To specify a port as the output destination for cue signals L and R, press one of the
CUE OUTPUT buttons (L/R) in the meter field to open the PORT SELECT popup window, and choose from the following cue signal output destinations (multiple selections are allowed).
Monitor and Cue functions
6.
To enable Cue out for the port you specified in step 5, press the CUE OUTPUT button to turn it on.
NOTE
The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES output jacks regardless of whether the
CUE OUTPUT button is on or off.
However, be aware that the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output if CUE
INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES output jack, regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting.
7.
Press the [CUE] key for a desired channel or DCA group to turn it on.
The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the output destination specified in step
5 and to monitor output.
A cue meter is shown in the meter field of the function access area, indicating the cue output level.
The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation indicating the currently-enabled cue group or cue type. The abbreviations displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning.
IN
DCA
OUT
EFFECT
KEY IN
REC/PB
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
CUE in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK (Other CUE groups)
KEY IN CUE in the DYNAMICS 1 popup window (Other CUE groups)
CUE in the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUT (Other CUE groups)
DANTE 1-64
OMNI1–8
DIGI OUT L/R
SLOT1–1 – SLOT3–16
Output channels 1–64 to audio network
OMNI OUT jacks 1–8
DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit
Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–3
When you have selected an output port, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
CUE meter
NOTE
• When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER popup window, you can press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX
• If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP popup window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on “[CUE] → [SEL] LINK”
(see
).
104
Reference Manual
8.
If you’re auditioning the CUE signal in the monitor, adjust the Cue signal level by using the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel. Also adjust the MONITOR FADER LEVEL in conjunction with this.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, the cue signal level when monitoring through headphones can be adjusted in three ways: the CUE LEVEL knob, the MONITOR FADER, and the PHONES
LEVEL knob.
NOTE
To adjust the level to the cue out port you specified in step 5, adjust the gain of the output port that is patched to it.
9.
To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again.
You can press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field of the CUE popup window to clear all cue selections.
NOTE
• If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared.
• All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section.
• You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key
(see
105
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
About the Talkback and Oscillator functions
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers and staff. If necessary, you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack on the I/O device or the
OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback.
CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room or hall.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals.
MIX
1 2 .
23
ST
L R
M
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 .
7 8
CUE
L R
CASCADE IN
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
SLOT3 1-16
CASCADE
IN
SELECT
+48V
[TALKBACK
INPUT]
TALKBACK
INPUT
1
2
3
+48V MASTER
ON
+48V
+
-
[DANTE] DANTE
INPUT
64
AD
TALKBACK
LEVEL
1
[OMNI IN]
[1-8]
OMNI IN
1
2
3
+48V
+
-
AD
GAIN/TRIM
8
HA
METER
HA
METER TALKBACK
TB INPUT
DANTE IN 1-64
OMNI IN 1-8
INPUT
SELECT
DANTE
METER
OSCILLATOR
Sine Wave
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
HPF LPF
ON
LEVEL
OSC
METER
ON
Talkback and Oscillator
Using Talkback
The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback settings, and turn talkback on or off.
If you want to view or edit the talkback settings in greater detail, use the TALKBACK popup window described in step 2 and subsequent steps.
1 2 3 4 5
1 TALKBACK popup display button
Enables you to access the TALKBACK popup window, in which you can make detailed talkback settings.
2 TALKBACK IN field
• +48V indicator .......................... Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
• TALKBACK IN level meter..... Meters the level of signals after the input gain at the
TALKBACK jack.
106
Reference Manual
3 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
.......................... Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a desired input port to an input port to patch to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button.
• +48V indicator .......................... Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power supplied to the selected port.
• ANALOG GAIN knob ............. Sets the analog gain of the selected port. You can adjust the gain by using the multifunction knobs.
• HA meter.................................... Displays the level of the HA input signal.
4 TALKBACK ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback signal.
5 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
2.
Press the TALKBACK popup display button or the ASSIGN field to open the
TALKBACK popup window.
In this popup window you can make detailed settings for talkback.
1 2
3
4
Talkback and Oscillator
2 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
This field allows a mic connected to a conventional input port to be used as a talkback input.
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button.
• +48V button
This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input port.
• ANALOG GAIN knob
Adjusts the analog gain setting for the selected input port. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain.
• HA meter
Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port.
• GC ON button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will appear if the input jack of the I/O device is patched.
• Gain Compensation meter
Indicates the level after Gain Compensation. It will appear if the input jack of the I/O device is patched.
NOTE
These parameters and meters will not appear if no input port is selected.
3 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
4 ASSIGN field
• Channel select buttons
Enable you to select a channel (bus) on which the talkback signal is sent.
• CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
3.
Connect a mic to the TALKBACK jack on the front panel, and then rotate the
TALKBACK GAIN knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic signal.
The meter in the TALKBACK IN field indicates the input level of the mic connected to the
TALKBACK jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be supplied to the TALKBACK jack, turn on the +48V button located in the TALKBACK IN field.
1
TALKBACK IN field
• +48V button
Switches on or off the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
• TALKBACK level meter
Indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack.
107
Reference Manual
4.
If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary input for talkback, follow the steps below.
4-1. Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
4-2. Press the button for the input that you want to use for talkback to turn the button indicator on.
You can select only one input at a time.
4-3. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
Use the INPUT TO TALKBACK field GAIN knob and level meter to adjust the input level of the connected mic.
NOTE
The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
5.
Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the bus(es) to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
NOTE
You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
6.
To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on.
The TALKBACK ON button will alternately turn on or off each time you press the button (Latch operation).
While talkback is on, signals from the TALKBACK jack and the selected INPUT jack will be output to the destination buses.
NOTE
• You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case, you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only while you continue holding down the key) (see
• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the talkback signal (see
Using the Oscillator function
Talkback and Oscillator
You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings, and turn the oscillator on or off.
If you want to view or edit the oscillator settings in greater detail, use the OSCILLATOR popup window described in step 2 and subsequent steps.
1
2
5
4
108
3
1
OSCILLATOR popup display button
Enables you to access the OSCILLATOR popup window, in which you can make detailed oscillator settings.
2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field
This adjusts the level of the oscillator. A meter beside the LEVEL knob indicates the output level of the oscillator. If OSCILLATOR MODE is set to SINE WAVE, the frequency of the oscillator is shown.
Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator level using the multifunction knob.
3
OSCILLATOR MODE field
Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly will switch modes.
Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off.
2.
Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field to open the OSCILLATOR popup window.
In this popup window, you can make detailed settings for the oscillator.
1 2
5
4
Mode = SINE WAVE
• LEVEL knob .............. Indicates the output level of the sine wave.
• FREQ knob................ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave.
Mode = PINK NOISE
• LEVEL knob .............. Indicates the output level of the pink noise.
• HPF knob................... Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink noise.
Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off.
• LPF knob.................... Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink noise.
Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off.
Mode = BURST NOISE
3
1
OSCILLATOR MODE buttons
Select one of the following three oscillator operating modes:
SINE WAVE
PINK NOISE
BURST NOISE
When the oscillator is turned on, a sine wave will be output continuously.
When the oscillator is turned on, pink noise will be output continuously.
When the oscillator is turned on, pink noise will be output intermittently.
2
Parameter field
Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this field vary depending on the selected mode. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs.
• LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and
LPF knob .................... Same as in PINK NOISE mode.
• WIDTH...................... Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently.
• INTERVAL ................ Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts.
Level
INTERVAL
Pink noise output
WIDTH
Time
Turn BURST NOISE button is on.
109
Reference Manual
3 ASSIGN section
Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of the three tabs located at the bottom of the screen, then press the button(s) for the channel(s) in this section
(multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED” indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection.
You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4 Meter section
Indicates the oscillator output level.
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator on or off.
3.
Press a button in the MODE field to select the type of signal you want to output.
4.
Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters.
The displayed parameters will differ depending on the oscillator selected in the MODE field. The knobs shown in the parameter field can be operated using the corresponding multifunction knobs.
5.
Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
6.
To enable the oscillator, press the OUTPUT button to turn it on.
The oscillator signal will be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in step 5. When you press the button again, the oscillator will turn off.
110
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
Meters
This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all channels, and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge.
Operations in the METER screen
By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on the screen, and switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which the level is detected).
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the METER field to access the METER screen.
INPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
OUTPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels.
Meters
111
Reference Manual
Meters
INPUT/OUTPUT tabs
Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen and OUTPUT METER screen.
Centralogic fader display
This area displays the level of the faders currently set in the Centralogic section.
Fader level and meter display
This area displays the meter, fader, and level value for each channel.
1
4
5
2
3
1 Channel number
Indicates the channel number.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 OVER indicator
This indicator will light if the signal clips at the METERING POINT.
4 Meter
This meter indicates the input or output level of the channel.
5 Fader
The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that appears immediately below the fader.
NOTE
Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic section.
METERING POINT field
Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected.
■ For INPUT METER
• PRE HPF.................... Immediately before the HPF
• PRE FADER .............. Pre-fader (immediately before INPUT
DELAY)
• POST ON................... Immediately after the [ON] key
■ For OUTPUT METER
• PRE EQ ...................... Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER .............. Immediately before the fader
• POST ON................... Immediately after the [ON] key
NOTE
On the CL3 or CL1 console, the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional meter bridge (MBCL).
PEAK HOLD button
Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication.
2.
If necessary, press a button in the METERING POINT field to switch the metering point.
The metering point for the level meters can be set independently for input channels and output channels.
3.
If you want the peak levels of the level meter to be held, press the PEAK HOLD button to turn it on.
PEAK HOLD button on/off operations will affect both input channels and output channels as well as the MBCL meter bridge. When you turn this button off, the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared.
NOTE
You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key
(see
).
112
Reference Manual
Meters
Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console
If the optional meter bridge (MBCL) is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console, you will always be able to view the output levels of MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO, and CUE channels.
The MBCL meters indicate the output levels in 12-segment steps (OVER, –3 dB, –6 dB, –9 dB, –12 dB,
–15 dB, –18 dB, –24 dB, –30 dB, –40 dB, –50 dB, –60 dB).
You can select the metering point (the point at which the level is detected) from the following choices.
For information on how to change the metering point, refer to the section “
Operations in the METER screen
” on
.
• PRE EQ .......................Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER ...............Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ...................Immediately after the [ON] key
113
Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack.
About the virtual rack
CL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ”) and effects/processors to modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any fifteen of thirty-one bands. You can also use 54 different effect types. The CL series consoles feature
Premium Rack, which employs VCM technology. This technology models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers six types of processors.
In order to use a GEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, effect, or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can mount a GEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1–16, an effect rack instance in each of the eight racks 1–8, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight racks 1–8.
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the “31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.)
The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
MIX
INSERT OUT
1-24
STEREO
INSERT OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX
INSERT OUT
1-8
MIX OUT
1-24
MATRIX OUT
1-8
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
CH
INSERT OUT
1-72{64,48}
GEQ
RACK IN
PATCH
GEQ1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
GEQ2-16 IN
A(L)/B(R)
EFFECT
RACK IN
PATCH
GEQ RACK1(GEQ1)
METER RACK IN
31BandGEQ
METER RACK OUT
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
Flex15GEQ
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
GEQ RACK2-16(GEQ2-16) (same as GEQ RACK1)
FX1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
FX2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PREMIUM
RACK IN
PATCH
EFFECT RACK1(FX1)
METER RACK IN
31BandGEQ
METER RACK OUT
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
Flex15GEQ
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
EFFECT
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT CUE
EFFECT RACK2-8(FX2-8) (same as EFFECT RACK1)
PR1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PR2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PREMIUM RACK1(PR1)
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
PROCESSOR
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT CUE
PREMIUM RACK2-8 (same as PREMIUM RACK1)
INSERT IN
PATCH
(INPUT CH)
OMNI IN 1-8
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
SLOT3 1-16
FX1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
PR 1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
72
CH INSERT IN 1-72{64,48}
INSERT IN
PATCH
(OUTPUT CH)
OMNI IN 1-8
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
SLOT3 1-16
GEQ1-16
OUT
A(L)/B(R)
24
3
8
MIX INSERT IN 1-24
STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8
FX1 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
FX2-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
To CH INSERT IN
To MIX INSERT IN
To STEREO INSERT IN
To MATRIX INSERT IN
PR1 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
PR2-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
NOTE
The CL console provides a rack for mounting an I/O device (such as an Rio series), external head amps (Yamaha AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.) as well as the virtual rack for GEQ, effects and Premium
Rack. For details, see “
I/O device and external head amp ” on page 138
.
114
Reference Manual
Virtual rack operations
This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the input and output of the rack as an example.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
2 Rack mount popup button
Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window, in which you can select the type of the rack you want to mount.
3 SAFE toggle button
Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. Racks with Recall Safe on will be excluded from Recall operations.
4
INPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack input. The selected path will appear on the button.
2.
In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ 1–8, GEQ 9–16, or
EFFECT tab to access the GEQ or EFFECT field.
1 1
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
5
OUTPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack output. The selected path will appear on the button.
23 4 6 5 23 4 6 5
1 Rack tabs
Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ 1–8 and GEQ 9–16
(GEQ rack), EFFECT (effect rack), and PREMIUM (Premium Rack).
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
NOTE
For the CL3/CL1, the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH fields will be shown crossed-out if a channel that does not exist on that model has been specified.
6 Rack container
Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you selected in the RACK MOUNTER popup window.
115
Reference Manual
• If nothing is mounted:
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
3.
To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack.
The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear.
1 2 1 2
Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window, in which you can select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack.
• If 31BandGEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings.
• If Flex15GEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B.
• If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only):
This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status, and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT popup window, in which you can modify the effect settings.
7
7
Link indicator
Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, or A and B of the Flex15GEQ are linked each other.
3 4 5 3 4 5
1
Rack number
This indicates the number of the selected rack.
2
Virtual rack
This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons.
3
MODULE SELECT
Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following function.
• BLANK button .......................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the rack will be empty.
• 31BandGEQ button.................. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack.
• Flex15GEQ button.................... Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
• EFFECT button ......................... Mounts an effect in the rack.
NOTE
Input/output patching will be defeated if you change the item mounted in a rack.
4 CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
5 OK button
Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the window, all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ or effect once again.
• You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by pressing a vacant rack in the GEQ/
EFFECT field.
116
Reference Manual
4.
Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button.
5.
To select the input source for a rack, press the INPUT PATCH button for that rack.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input source for the rack.
Switch the list as necessary, and select the input source channel that you want to patch.
When you select an input source in the CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you for confirmation. To confirm the operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
• You have the option of making settings so that the confirmation dialog box will not appear
(see
• Normally you can specify two channels of input for each rack. However if you have selected
31BandGEQ, only one channel can be used.
2
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
2 Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the input source channel.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
NOTE
In the case of the GEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on.
Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
6.
To select the output source for a rack, press the OUTPUT PATCH button for that rack.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output destination for the rack. Switch the list items as necessary, and select the output destination that you want to use.
When you select an output destination in the CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the change. To confirm the change, press the OK button.
NOTE
• You can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear (see
).
• Normally you will be able to specify two channels of output for a rack, but if the 31BandGEQ is selected only one channel can be used.
1 3
1 Category select list
Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window.
• MIX/MATRIX.................................. MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8
*1, *2
• ST/MONO......................................... STEREO L/R, MONO
*1, *2
• INSERT OUT 1–32.......................... CH 1–32
*1
• INSERT OUT 33–64 ....................... CH 33–64
*1
• INSERT OUT 65–72 ....................... CH 65–72
*1
• INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX ....... MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8
• INSERT OUT ST/MONO .............. STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1–16 RACK.
*2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
117
1 3
1
Category select list
Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window.
• CH 1–32 ...................................... CH 1–32
*1, *2
• CH 33–64 .................................... CH 33–64
*1, *2
2
Reference Manual
• CH 65–72.................................... CH 65–72
*1, *2
• INSERT IN 1–32 ....................... CH 1–32
*1
• INSERT IN 33–64..................... CH 33–64
*1
• INSERT IN 65–72..................... CH 65–72
*1
• INSERT IN MIX/MATRIX..... MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8
• INSERT IN ST/MONO............ STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1-16 RACK.
*2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
2 Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the output destination.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
7.
To switch Recall Safe on/off for each rack, press the SAFE button for that rack.
If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack, the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more information on Recall Safe, “
Using the Recall Safe function ”
on
Be aware that the Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or outputdestination channel.
NOTE
The type of GEQ, effect, or premium rack mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input-source and output-destination patch settings are saved as part of the scene.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Graphic EQ operations
About the graphic EQ
The CL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1–16 and patch it to the insert-out and insert-in of a MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in
EFFECT racks 1–8 (FX 1–8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be adjusted using the faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section.
The following two types of GEQ are provided.
■ 31BandGEQ
This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and the gain of all thirty-one bands can be adjusted.
If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of input and output can be used for that rack.
INPUT
Rack
31BandGEQ
OUTPUT
■ Flex15GEQ
This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB. The
Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of
INPUT
Rack
Flex15GEQ (A)
OUTPUT the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31bandGEQ.
(Once you have used up fifteen bands of adjustment, you
Flex15GEQ (B) will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.)
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output. If you mount a
Flex15GEQ in each rack, you will be able to use up to 48 GEQ units simultaneously.
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
1.
Refer to steps 1–6 in the “
Virtual rack operations ” on page 115 section to mount a
GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination.
The rack shown in the GEQ field indicates the approximate GEQ settings and the input and output levels. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units
(A and B).
NOTE
If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later step.
118
Reference Manual
2.
In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field, press the rack in which you mounted the GEQ.
The GEQ popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the GEQ parameters.
NOTE
The popup windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the
Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.
2 3 4 5 6
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
3.
If you are using a stereo source, link the two GEQ units.
You will be able to use the GEQ LINK button if you have selected a 31BandGEQ or Flex15GEQ for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. When you turn this button on, the following popup window will appear. To enable linking, press any button other than CANCEL. The popup window contains the following items.
1
1 Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1–8, among GEQ 9–16 or among EFFECT1–8. For a rack in which a Flex 15
GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
2
INPUT PATCH button
Opens the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field.
3 OUTPUT PATCH button
Opens the CH SELECT popup window, enabling you to select the output destination of the rack.
The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field.
4
GEQ LINK button
Links adjacent GEQ units.
In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same rack will be linked.
NOTE
The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible.
5 FLAT button
Returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB.
6 GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off.
119
1
2
3
4
1 GEQ x ➞y button (“x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
2 GEQ y ➞x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
3 RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
4 CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the popup window.
When you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
4.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on.
After you have turned the GEQ on, adjust the bands of the GEQ.
For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “
Using the 31BandGEQ ” on page 120
, or “ Using the Flex15GEQ ” on page 121 .
NOTE
You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field.
Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the 31BandGEQ
You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ.
1.
Refer to steps 1–6 in the “
Virtual rack operations ” section on page 115
to mount a
31BandGEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination.
The rack in which the 31BandGEQ is mounted will show the approximate settings and input and output levels.
2.
In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field, press the rack in which you mounted the
31BandGEQ.
The GEQ popup window will appear. In the GEQ popup window you can use the tabs to switch among the racks.
1
2
3
1 EQ graph
Indicates the approximate response of the current 31BandGEQ.
2 Faders
Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below.
3
FADER ASSIGN field
In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic section’s faders.
3.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on.
4.
Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders.
120
The buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands.
20–100
63–315
200–1k
630–3.15k
2k–10k
4k–20k
Eight bands 20.0 Hz–100 Hz
Eight bands 63.0 Hz–315 Hz
Eight bands 200 Hz–1.00 kHz
Eight bands 630 Hz–3.15 kHz
Eight bands 2.00 kHz–10.0 kHz
Eight bands 4.00 kHz–20.0 kHz
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band.
NOTE
The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state.
5.
Operate the faders in the Centralogic section.
The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut.
NOTE
When a fader in the Centralogic section is set to the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key indicator will turn off. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust each band.
NOTE
If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However, if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
7.
When you have finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field.
The faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function.
NOTE
When you close the GEQ popup window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
8.
If you want to copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
• Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
• GEQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library.
Reference Manual
Using the Flex15GEQ
You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.
1.
Refer to steps 1–6 in the “
Virtual rack operations ” section on page 115
to mount a
Flex15GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B).
NOTE
If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack.
However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.
2.
Press the rack in which you mounted the Flex15GEQ.
The GEQ popup window for GEQ(A) or GEQ(B) will appear.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on the touch screen will turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band.
NOTE
The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field, the faders will return to the locked state.
5.
Operate the faders in the Centralogic section.
For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B), a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled.
The AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box in the FADER ASSIGN field indicates the real-time number of additional bands that can be controlled in the current GEQ. If you have used all fifteen bands, you will have to return one of these bands to the flat position before you can operate any other band.
This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled in the current GEQ.
For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
3.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on.
4.
Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders.
For details on the bands corresponding to each button in the FADER ASSIGN field, refer to step
” on
.
121
NOTE
• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band has been modified.
• To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make it go dark.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust up to fifteen bands.
NOTE
If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
7.
When you have finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field.
The faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function.
NOTE
When you close the GEQ popup window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
8.
If you want to copy the currently-displayed Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
GEQ settings can be saved and recalled using the dedicated library.
Reference Manual
About the internal effects
The internal effects of the CL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1–8, and patched to an output channel’s output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For each effect mounted in a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect.
With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 17–24 are input to racks 1–8, and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1–8 (L/R).
NOTE
Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7.
To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel. to the input of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is used as an effect return channel.
Rack 1
EFFECT
Rack 2
EFFECT
Output of the output channel
Input of the input channel
Rack 7
EFFECT
Rack 8
EFFECT
Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel.
Insert-out of a desired channel*
EFFECT
Insert-in of a desired channel*
* Excluding a ST IN channel
The internal effects are categorized into two groups: “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the two channels before processing them.
If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
■ STEREO type effects
INPUT L
INPUT R
EFFECT L
EFFECT R
L RETURN
R RETURN
■ MIX type effects
INPUT L
INPUT R
EFFECT
L RETURN
R RETURN
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However, please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK.
INPUT
L or R
EFFECT
L RETURN
R RETURN
Using an internal effect via send and return
This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration.
NOTE
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it can be convenient to assign the send
1.
Follow steps 1–3 described in “ Virtual rack operations
” on
, to mount an effect in a rack.
The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, the number of inputs and outputs, and the levels before and following the effect.
122
Reference Manual
2.
Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “
L input of the effect.
If you are using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channel to the L/R inputs of the rack.
3.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the L input of the desired ST IN channel as the output-destination for the rack.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “
the L output of the effect.
If you are using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output of the rack in the same way.
NOTE
You can select more than one output destination for the effect.
4.
Press the rack in which you mounted the effect.
The EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the effect parameters.
2
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field.
3 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
4 MIX BAL. knob
This knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.
5.
As necessary, use the multifunction knob to adjust the MIX BAL. knob.
Adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. This parameter is provided for all effect types.
If you are using the effect via send and return, set this to 100% (effect sound only).
NOTE
on
.
6.
To adjust the effect send level of an input channel, use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel you want to control.
3
1
4
1 INPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ field.
123
Reference Manual
7.
Use the MIX1-16, MIX17-24 and MATRIX keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL section
(top panel) so that the SEND field shows the MIX bus that is patched as the effect send.
You can also use the MIX1-16, MIX17-24 and MATRIX buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen to switch the displayed bus.
8.
Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob that corresponds to the desired MIX bus, and turn the multifunction knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to the MIX bus.
In this state you can adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the internal effect. Adjust the send level of other input channels in the same way.
If you press the selected knob once again, the MIX SEND popup window (8ch) for the senddestination MIX bus will appear. This popup window contains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST)
(see
NOTE
At this time, you make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to –∞ dB. If you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing oscillation.
9.
To adjust the master level of the effect send, call up the MIX channel you specified as the input-source of the rack in step 2 to the Centralogic section, and adjust the corresponding fader.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload point.
NOTE
The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT popup window.
10.
To adjust the effect return level, operate the ST IN channel that you selected as the output-destination for the rack in step 3.
Inserting an internal effect into a channel
This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel).
1.
Follow steps 1–3 described in “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 115
, to mount an effect in a rack.
The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, the number of inputs and outputs, and the levels before and after the effect.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
2.
Press the L side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-out of a channel as the input-source.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “
Virtual rack operations ” on page 115 . Insert-out is now assigned to the L input of the effect.
3.
Press the L side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the output-destination.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “
Virtual rack operations ” on page 115 . Insert-in is now assigned to the L output of the effect.
If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output.
4.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel into which you inserted the effect.
5.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
Make sure that the rack you inserted into the input and output ports is selected. For more
information on insert-out/in, see “ Inserting an external device into a channel
” on
6.
Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the effect.
If it is off, press the button to turn it on. In this state, effect insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel.
7.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field.
8.
Press the effect rack that you inserted into the channel. The EFFECT popup window will appear.
In this popup window you can edit the effect parameters.
9.
Select the effect type and edit the effect parameters.
For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters.”
NOTE
• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT popup window.
• Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect.
10.
Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step
3, adjust the level as appropriate.
124
Reference Manual
Editing the internal effect parameters
This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters.
1.
Follow steps 1–3 described in “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 115
, to mount an effect in a rack.
A rack in which an effect is mounted will show the following information.
1 2
1 Effect title/type
This area indicates the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
2 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
2.
Press the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted.
The EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the effect parameters. In the
EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs to switch among the eight racks (EFFECT 1 –
EFFECT 8).
3 4 2 5
6
7
1
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
1 INPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window.
2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window.
3 Effect type field
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown. Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window, in which you can select the effect type.
4 EFFECT CUE button
Enables you to cue-monitor the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch to a different screen.
5 Special parameter field
Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types.
6 BYPASS button
Temporarily bypasses the effect.
7 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
8 Effect parameter field
This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a knob in this field, you will be able to use the multifunction knobs to control the corresponding horizontal row of knobs.
You can also make fine adjustments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it down.
9 Rack select tabs
Use these tabs to switch among EFFECT 1–8.
8
9
125
Reference Manual
3.
To change the effect type, press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window.
Press a new effect type to select it.
NOTE
• You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting.
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8.
4.
To edit the effect parameters, press a knob in the effect parameter field to select it, and turn the corresponding multifunction knob.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the Appendices (see page 233
).
5.
Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary.
For some effect types, parameters such as the following will appear in the special parameter field.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
■ TEMPO
This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected.
1 MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the MIDI port.
1
■ PLAY/REC
This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
1 PLAY button/REC button
Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using the freeze effect. For detailed operations, see “
Using the Freeze effect ” on page 129 .
1
■ SOLO
This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is selected as the effect type.
1 HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple selections are allowed).
2 Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band.
■ Gain reduction meter
This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is selected as the effect type.
1 Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
1
1
2
126
Reference Manual
■ Type
This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect type.
1
1 DRIVE button/CLEAN button
Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects.
DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits, creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion.
2
CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits, creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital.
2 FLAT button
This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB.
6.
If you want to monitor the output signal of the currently-displayed effect, press the
EFFECT CUE button to turn it on.
NOTE
If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the
EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.)
7.
If you want to bypass the currently-displayed effect, press the BYPASS button to turn it on.
8.
If you want to copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
Effect settings can be stored and recalled using the effect library.
Using the Tap Tempo function
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval.
To use the Tap function, you must first assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key.
1.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
127
Reference Manual
This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
4.
Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the
Tap Tempo function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear.
5.
Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
PARAMETER 1 column, and press the OK button.
Use the / buttons or multifunction knobs to select an item in each column. Press the OK button. The Tap Tempo function will be assigned to the USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4.
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[16].
NOTE
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack).
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=1–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column, you will be able to use the Tap
Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack).
• For more information on USER DEFINED keys, see “
USER DEFINED keys ” on page 169 .
6.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field.
7.
Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted.
The EFFECT popup window will appear.
128
Reference Manual
8.
Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window, and select an effect type that includes the BPM parameter.
The BPM parameter is included in delay-type and modulation-type effects, and can be used to specify the delay time or modulation speed.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the
Appendices (see
).
9.
Set the SYNC parameter to ON.
10.
At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function.
The average interval (BPM) at which you press the key will be calculated, and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter.
The average interval will be input to the parameter.
(the average of a, b, and c) a b c
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Freeze effect
This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen to record (sample) and play back a sound.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field.
2.
Mount an effect in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
NOTE
Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
3.
Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted.
The EFFECT popup window will appear.
4.
Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window, and select
“FREEZE.”
If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will appear in the special parameter field.
First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap
NOTE
• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored.
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
1 3 2
1 PLAY button
2 REC button
3 Progress bar
NOTE
As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall the “FREEZE” effect type from the effect library.
129
Reference Manual
5.
To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY button.
The signal being input to the effect will be recorded. The bar reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
NOTE
You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed settings for recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For details on the
parameters, refer to the Appendices (see page 242
).
6.
To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button.
NOTE
The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off the power to the CL unit.
Using the Premium Rack
About the Premium Rack
The CL series console features processors that faithfully emulate meticulously-selected vintage analog processors, and a newly-developed Premium Rack, as well as graphic EQs and built-in effects. The
Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog sounds.
The Premium Rack offers six types of processors.
Name
Portico 5033
Portico 5043
U76
Opt–2A
EQ–1A
Dynamic EQ
Outline
Models RND’s analog 5-band EQ.
Models RND’s analog compressor/limiter.
Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter.
Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor.
Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ.
Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Premium Rack
The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack.
(see
)
For the premium rack, only racks 1–2 can be used via send/return. Racks 3–8 are only for patching as
inserts. (Refer to steps 5 and 6 of “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 115
.)
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window.
2.
In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the PREMIUM tab to display the PREMIUM RACK field.
130
Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
3.
To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the RACK MOUNT button for that rack.
The PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear.
4.
Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the type you want to mount, and press the OK button.
There are two ways to mount each processor:
• DUAL ..........................The processor is used on two mono channels.
• STEREO......................The processor is used on one stereo channel.
The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by the
Premium Rack processor.
The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a twospace Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more processors below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an even-numbered rack.
5.
Press the L side or the A side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-out of a channel as the input-source.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “
Virtual rack operations ” on page 115 . Insert-out is now assigned to the L input of the processor.
6.
Press the L side or the A side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the outputdestination.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “
Virtual rack operations ” on page 115 . Insert-in is now assigned to the L output of the processor.
If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor.
7.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel into which you want to insert the processor.
8.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
Make sure that the rack you inserted in the input and output ports is selected. For details on Insert
Out/In, refer to “
Inserting an external device into a channel ” on page 21 .
9.
Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the processor.
If it is off, press the button to turn it on. In this state, processor insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel.
10.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and use the PREMIUM tab to display the PREMIUM RACK field.
11.
Press the processor rack that you inserted into the channel to open the Premium
Rack popup window.
In this popup window you can edit the processor parameters.
131
Reference Manual
12.
Adjust the parameters.
For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack parameters.”
NOTE
Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the processor.
13.
Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step 6, adjust the level as appropriate.
Editing the Premium Rack parameters
Each Premium Rack window includes the following items:
1 2 3
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
■ Portico 5033
Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve Designs
(RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of the “1073,” which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve. Yamaha’s VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output transformer that was designed by Mr.
Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model produces musically high-quality sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears.
8
3
5
1
2 7
4
1 ASSIST button
Press this button to open a window in which you can assign the parameters to the multifunction knobs for control.
2 LIBRARY button
Press the button to open the Library popup window for Premium Rack. (For each module type)
3 DEFAULT button
Restores the default parameter setting.
4 Multifunction knob access field
Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction knobs.
To switch the parameter to control, press the knob in the window.
NOTE
• If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them.
• You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
132
4 6
1
ALL BYPASS button
Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even when EQ bypass is on, the signal will pass through the input/ output transformer and amp circuits.
2 TRIM knob
Adjusts the input gain of the effect.
3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs
Adjust the frequency for each band.
4 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs
Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band.
5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs
Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range in which you can control the gain for the band.
Reference Manual
6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button
Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively.
7 LF/HF IN button
Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously.
8 Graph
Indicates the graphical EQ response.
■ Portico 5043
Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND’s analog compressor.The actual 5043
Compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the 5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type (which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-
Back) circuit which was typically used in vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as appropriate for your applications.
1 2 3 4
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
3 FB button
Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (Feed-Back) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected.
The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you want to apply compression thoroughly while maintaining a consistent tonal color.
The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal color that is characteristic to the device.
4 GAIN REDUCTION meter
Indicates the amount of gain reduction.
5 THRESHOLD knob
Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied.
6 RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to switch to the limiter.
7 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time.
8 RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time.
9 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain.
5 6 7 8 9
1 IN button
Turns the compressor’s bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass through the input/ output transformer and amp circuits.
2 INPUT meter
Indicates the input signal level.
One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.
133
Reference Manual
■ U76
U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of situations. This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on conventional compressors.
Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the balance between the input gain and the output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overtones.
1 2
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
6 OUTPUT knob
Adjusts the output level.
If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT level, the level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust the volume level.
■ Opt–2A
Opt–2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube opto compressors. It features smooth compression produced using optical components such as a photocell and a light source to control the level. It also features beautiful high-range overtones created by the warm distortion typical of tube circuits, resulting in elegant and sophisticated sounds.
3 4 5 6
1 INPUT knob
Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied.
2 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest attack time.
3 RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest release time.
4
RATIO switch buttons
Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio.
A button with the higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive sound.
5 METER switch buttons
Switch the meter display.
• GR.....................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
• +4/+8 ................Each meter uses –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and indicates
“0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or +8 dB.
• OFF...................Turns off the meter display.
134
1 2 3 4
1 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output level.
2 PEAK REDUCTION knob
Adjusts the compression amount of the signal.
3 RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio.
4 METER SELECT knob
Switches the meter display.
GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction when the compressor is operating.
With –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT +4 settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to be shown as
“0VU” on the meter.
Reference Manual
■ EQ–1A
EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency ranges (high and low). The frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ, and is a uniquely distinctive characteristic of this model. The input/output circuits and vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced.
3 4 5 7 8 9
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
7 (HIGH) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH FREQUENCY knob.
8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN SEL knob.
9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob
Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob.
■ Dynamic EQ
Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of equalizer. The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency region, causing the
EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific frequency region of the input signal becomes too high or too low. For example you could use this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band
Dynamic EQs are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources.
1 2 6
1
IN switch
Turns the processor on or off.
When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2
LOW FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the low range filter.
3
(LOW) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW FREQUENCY knob.
4 (LOW) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
5
BAND WIDTH knob
Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter.
As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost.
6
HIGH FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost.
135
6
5
9
0
1
3
4
2 8 A
1 BAND ON/OFF button
Turns each band on or off.
7B
C
Reference Manual
2 SIDECHAIN CUE button
Press this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time, the graph indicates the filter response for the sidechain.
3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button
Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus (such as a
STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent. At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
4 FILTER TYPE buttons
Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and sidechain filter will link as follows:
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
B THRESHOLD meter
Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level.
C Graph area
Displays the equalizer response.
In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and intensity, and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ responses.
FILTER TYPE
Main EQ
Sidechain filter
(Low Shelf)
Low Shelf
LPF
(Bell)
Bell
BPF
(Hi Shelf)
Hi Shelf
HPF
5
FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter.
6
Q knob
Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter.
As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or sidechain filter is applied will become wider.
7
THRESHOLD knob
Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking an effect.
8
RATIO knob
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut. Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect.
9
ATTACK/RELEASE buttons
Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression or boost.
Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending on the frequency ranges.
0 MODE buttons
Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW).
A
EQ GAIN meter
Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain.
136
Dynamic EQ graph
Reference EQ graph
If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter response.
Sidechain filter graph
Reference Manual
Using the graphic EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries
■ GEQ library
Use the “GEQ library” to store and recall GEQ settings. All GEQ units used in the CL series console can reference this GEQ library. Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ, you are free to recall items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ.
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is read-only data for initialization, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the GEQ popup window.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
■ Premium Rack library
For the premium rack, there are six library items for each module type. You’ll use the library of each module type to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The libraries are numbered 000–100, and 000 is read-only data for initialization. All library items other than #000 can be freely read and written.
To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the popup window for the corresponding Premium Rack.
NOTE
• Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store and recall two Flex15GEQ units independently as A and B.
• To access the GEQ popup window, press the rack in the GEQ field.
■ Effect library
Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Numbers 001–027 are read-only presets, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the EFFECT popup window.
NOTE
If you recall an effect whose effect type is COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER610, OPENDECK, M.BAND DYNA., or M.BAND COMP, the other effects may be momentarily muted in some cases.
137
Reference Manual
I/O device and external head amp
This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to the CL series console.
Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For details,
refer to “ Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
” on
.
Using an I/O device
CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such as an Rio series product) connected to the Dante connector.
For details on connecting the CL series console to an I/O device, refer to the “Connecting to I/O devices” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
I/O device patching
Here’s how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante audio network.
1.
Connect the CL series console to an I/O device.
For details, refer to the “Connecting to I/O devices” and “Quick Guide” sections in the separate
Owner’s Manual.
2.
In the function access area, press the I/O DEVICE button to access the I/O DEVICE screen.
I/O device and external head amp
3.
In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the DANTE PATCH tab to access the DANTE PATCH field.
The DANTE PATCH field includes the following items.
1
2
3
4
138
1
I/O device list
This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices.
Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window, where you can specify patching from the console’s output ports to the I/O devices.
2
DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can select any of 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console.
4
OUTPUT PORT SETUP button
Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT popup window, where you can choose the 64 channels that will be output from the console’s output ports to I/O devices.
4.
To specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console, press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button.
The DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window will appear. This popup window includes the following items.
Reference Manual
3
1 2
I/O device and external head amp
NOTE
• If you’ve connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the CL series, the upper line of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash “-”, and the channel number
(decimal).
• If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, the lower row will indicate nothing.
• You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate’s “Dante Controller” software. For the latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
5.
Press the AUTO SETUP button.
A confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the input patching from the I/O devices to the console; press OK, and the patching will be performed automatically.
6.
If you want to edit the patching individually, press the port select button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
1 LIBRARY button
Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library. You can store ten sets of settings in the library.
NOTE
• If you recall data whose I/O device registration state differs from the current state, patching to devices not registered in the I/O device list will be kept in its current state, and will not be recalled.
• Similarly, if the UNIT ID is different than when the data was stored, the settings will not be recalled; the current state will be maintained.
2 AUTO SETUP button
The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are registered in the I/O device list.
When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching. Otherwise, press
CANCEL to return to the previous screen.
3 Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
The Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number (decimal) are shown in the upper row on the button.
The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button.
If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will indicate nothing.
139
2
1 3
1
Category select list
Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign.
2
Port select buttons
Select the input port.
3
CLOSE button
Completes the settings and closes the popup window.
Reference Manual
7.
To assign the output ports of the I/O device, select and press the I/O device in the
DANTE PATCH field of the I/O device screen to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window.
The OUTPUT PATCH popup window will appear.
1
1 Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
8.
If you want to change the patching, press the port select button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
I/O device and external head amp
2 Port select buttons
Select the Dante port (DANTE 1–64) to which the signal you want to output is assigned.
3 CLOSE button
Completes the settings and closes the popup window.
9.
In the same way, specify the channels that you want to output to other OUTPUT ports.
Remotely controlling an Rio unit
Here’s how to remotely control an Rio unit that’s connected to the Dante connector.
1.
In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the Rio tab to access the Rio field.
The Rio field includes the following items.
1 2
3
2
1 3
1 Category select list
Select the Dante port to which the signal you want to output is assigned.
140
1
Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold down the button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.
2 ID/model name indication
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
Reference Manual
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
5
4
7
■ HA display
This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA popup window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings.
6
4
Analog gain knob
Indicates the analog gain setting. This item is only for display, and cannot be edited.
5
+48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port.
6
OVER indicator
Warns you when the input signal is clipping.
7
HPF indicator
Indicates the high pass filter on or off status for each port.
■ INPUT display
This shows the input settings of the I/O device.
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light.
■ OUTPUT display
This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device.
If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light.
141
I/O device and external head amp
2.
To remotely control the head amp of an I/O device, press the I/O device in the HA display.
The I/O DEVICE HA popup window will appear. In this window, you can remotely control the head amp on the I/O device from the CL series console by using the on-screen knobs and buttons or the multifunction knobs on the top panel.
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
+48V MASTER
Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device’s master phantom power. (Switching this on or off is performed on the I/O device itself.)
2 +48V button
Switch phantom power on or off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8. The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port.
4 GC button
Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the audio network.
5
FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O unit, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.
6
Displayed port switch tabs
These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA popup window.
7
GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
Reference Manual
6.
If you press a rack in which an output I/O device is mounted, the OUTPUT PATCH popup window will appear.
I/O device and external head amp
3.
To remotely control the I/O device’s head amp from an input channel of the CL series console, use the bank select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the head amp.
GAIN/PATCH field
4.
Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the I/O device’s head amp. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
If you need to make output port settings, make these settings as described in step 7 and following
of the I/O device patching procedure (see page 140 ).
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the popup window.
142
Reference Manual
Remotely controlling an amp
Here’s how to remotely control an amp that’s connected to the Dante connector.
1 2
3
I/O device and external head amp
2.
Press a displayed I/O device to open the OUTPUT PATCH popup window.
If you need to make output port settings, make these settings as described in step 7 and following
of the I/O device patching procedure (see page 140 ).
1.
In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the AMP tab to access the AMP field.
The AMP field includes the following items.
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
2 ID/model name indication
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
143
Reference Manual
Using an external head amp
If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head amp in the CL’s slot, you will be able to remotely control from the CL console some parameters of the external head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V) on/off status, gain, and HPF.
For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the owner’s manual for the I/O card.
Connecting the CL series console to an AD8HR
To remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card in
Slot 1 on the CL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console.
To transmit audio signals (input to the AD8HR) to the CL series console, connect the DIGITAL OUT
A (or B) connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a D-sub 25-pin
AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the CL series console via the MY16-ES64 card.
Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second AD8HR’s
HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to six AD8HR units. In this case, to input AD8HR’s audio signals into the CL series console, install two MY16-EX cards on the CL unit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel signals. Then, use an Ethernet cable to make connections to the MY16-ES64.
CL5
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
MY16-
ES64
Audio signal
Remote signal
I/O device and external head amp
NAI48-ES
HA REMOTE connector
DIGITAL
OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 1
HA REMOTE 2 connector
DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 2
HA REMOTE 2 connector
DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 3
HA REMOTE 2 connector
Up to six units
144
Reference Manual
I/O device and external head amp
MY16-
ES64
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
Connecting the CL series console to an SB168-ES
To remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the CL, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the SB168-ES. This connection enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console.
Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install two MY16-EX expansion cards in the slots on the CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168-ES units simultaneously.
NOTE
Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 on the CL series console.
■ Daisy chain connection
CL5
Audio signal
Remote signal
■ Ring connection
CL5
MY16-
ES64
MY16-
EX
OUT
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
Audio signal
Remote signal
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
NOTE
Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/
MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network.
145
Reference Manual
Remotely controlling an external head amp
You can remotely control from the CL series console an external head amp (“external HA”) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES.
1.
Connect the CL series console to an external HA.
For details, refer to the “ Using an external head amp ” on page 144
section and the owner’s manual of your external HA.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the I/O DEVICE button to access the I/O DEVICE window.
The EXTERNAL HA field includes the following items.
5 6
1
I/O device and external head amp
3.
In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE window, press the EXTERNAL HA tab to display the EXTERNAL HA field.
146
2 3 4
1 EXTERNAL HA field
Indicates the state of the connected external HA.
2 ID/Model name/+48V master
Displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to six. This field also enables you to view the on/off status of the master phantom power.
3 Virtual racks
This section accommodates up to six racks in which remotely-controllable external HA units can be mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the EXTERNAL HA popup window.
4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button
Press this button to open the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can specify the input ports to which the external HA mounted in the rack will be connected.
5 VIEW switch buttons
Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view according to the connected device.
Reference Manual
I/O device and external head amp
6 COMM PORT switch buttons
Specifies whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select
“SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA.
4.
Press the “SLOT1” COMM PORT switch button.
The external HA units that can be controlled will appear in the virtual rack.
5.
To specify the input ports for an external HA, press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button for that rack.
The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window will appear. The popup window includes the following items.
1
1 PORT SELECT buttons
Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected.
6.
Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
NOTE
If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console, you must specify an appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels.
7.
To remotely control an external HA, press the rack in which the external HA you want to control is mounted.
The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear. Here you can remotely control the external HA by using the on-screen knobs and buttons on the CL series console or the knobs on the top panel.
147
1
2
3
4
5
1
+48V MASTER
If an external HA is connected, the on/off status of the master phantom power is shown here.
(Switching this on or off is performed on the external HA itself.)
2 +48V button
Switches phantom power on or off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
Indicates the gain level of the external HA. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8. The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port.
4 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.
5 Rack select tabs
Enable you to select the rack displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window.
NOTE
• If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used. These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window even if an AD8HR is not connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected.
• Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to set the EtherSound parameters. Use the AVS-ESMonitor software application for these functions.
Reference Manual
8.
To remotely control the external HA from an input channel of the CL series console, use the Bank Select keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel on which you want to control the HA.
GAIN/PATCH field
9.
Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel on which you want to control the external HA. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
10.
Press the PATCH button, and select the input port assigned to the external HA.
With these settings, you will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on the I/O device or the CL unit. For details about the GAIN/PATCH popup window, refer to
“
” on
148
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
MIDI
This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series console to control the CL console’s parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from the CL console as you operate the unit.
MIDI functionality on the CL series console
The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations:
■ Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the CL series console, a Program
Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an external device.
Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device.
■ Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the CL series console, the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later.
■ Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception
When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter Changes are received from an external device.
Using this capability, CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and executed by another CL console.
NOTE
You can select the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages from the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in a slot 1. All of the functionality described in this section will be available on the port you select.
Basic MIDI settings
You can select the type of MIDI messages the CL series console will transmit and receive, the MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
MIDI
2.
In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window.
This window includes several pages, which you can switch among using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
149
Reference Manual
2
4
6
7
3.
Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page.
In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose the port that will be used. This page includes the following items.
1
3
5
1 PORT/CH field
Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages.
• Tx PORT/Tx CH.......Press these buttons to open popup windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit MIDI messages.
• Rx PORT/Rx CH.......Press these button to open popup windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive MIDI messages.
2 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx .................................Switches Program Change transmission on or off.
• Rx.................................Switches Program Change reception on or off.
• ECHO..........................Switches on or off echo output of Program Change messages (If this function is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.).
3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode.
• SINGLE.......................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).
• MULTI ........................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).
150
• OMNI ......................... If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/ reception and Single mode transmission are disabled.
• BANK ......................... If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group of
Program Change messages to be used.)
4 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx ................................ Switches Control Change transmission on or off.
• Rx ................................ Switches Control Change reception on or off.
• ECHO ......................... Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages (If this function is on, Control Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.).
5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode.
• NRPN ......................... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode).
• TABLE button........... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel (TABLE mode).
6 PARAMETER CHANGE field
Enables you to turn SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or off. (These special messages are used to change the CL parameters.)
• Tx ................................ Switches Parameter Change transmission on or off.
• Rx ................................ Switches Parameter Change reception on or off.
• ECHO ......................... Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages (If this function is on, Parameter Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.).
7 OTHER COMMAND field
Switches on or off echo output of other messages (If this function is on, other messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.).
MIDI
Reference Manual
4.
To specify the port that will be used to transmit or receive each type of MIDI message, press the transmit (Tx) or receive (Rx) port select popup button.
The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the port will appear. Operations in this window are the same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx). This window includes the following items.
1 2
6.
To specify the channel on which MIDI messages will be transmitted or received, press the channel select popup button.
The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the channel will appear. Operations in this window are the same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx). This window includes the following items.
1
MIDI
1 TERMINAL field
Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
You can choose from the following items.
NONE
MIDI
SLOT1
No port will be used.
MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel
A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on the rear panel
2 PORT NO. field
If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1–8 in this field. (The number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.) The currently-available card is valid only for port 1.
5.
Specify the type of port and the port number.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the selected port and close the MIDI SETUP popup window.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can select a port by pressing the desired port name in the field, or by pressing the field to highlight it and then rotating one of the multifunction knobs to select the port.
1
CH field
Enables you to select CH1–CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
7.
Select the channel.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the selected channel and close the MIDI SETUP popup window.
NOTE
• Alternatively, you can select the channel by pressing the desired channel in the field or by rotating one of the multifunction knobs.
• When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
8.
Turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI message.
NOTE
• For details on using Program Change messages, refer to “Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items,” below.
151
Reference Manual
MIDI
Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items
The CL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each
Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the CL console, a Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device.
1.
Connect the CL series console to an external device.
The following illustration shows an example of using the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages.
MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT
External device
1
3
This page includes the following items.
2
4
5
6
CL5
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window.
4.
Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, then select the port and
MIDI channel on which Program Changes will be transmitted and received, as
described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” on page 149
.
5.
Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab to access the PROGRAM CHANGE page.
On the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned to each program number.
152
1 PROGRAM CHANGE
Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked with the
PROGRAM CHANGE section on the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx ................................ Turn this button on to transmit corresponding Program Change messages when events on the list are executed.
• Rx ................................ Turn this button on to execute corresponding events when Program
Change messages are received.
• ECHO ........................ Turn this button on to transmit Program Change messages that are received from an external device.
2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked with the
PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section on the MIDI SETUP page.
3 List
Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI Program
Change number. The list shows the following items.
• CH/BANK ................. If “CH” appears as the column heading instead of “BANK,” the column indicates the MIDI channel (1–16) on which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,” and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number.
• NO............................... Indicates the program number 1–128.
Reference Manual
• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT
...............................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each channel
(bank number) or program number. Press an individual event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window, in which you can select the event that you want to assign.
4 Scroll knob
Press this knob to scroll the list using the multifunction knob.
5 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to erase all events from the list.
6 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
6.
Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the Program
Change transmission/reception mode.
You can select one of the following two Program Change transmission/reception modes.
• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on):
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.)
When a Program Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be transmitted.
• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on):
Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the MIDI
SETUP page will be transmitted and received.
When a Program Change on the Rx channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.)
If you turn on the OMNI button/BANK button in Single mode, operation will change as follows.
• When the OMNI button is on:
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for Program Change transmission.
• When the BANK button is on:
The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select (Control
Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single MIDI channel.
When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the CL series console, Bank Select and Program Change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank number will be used.
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case,
Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
7.
Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on or off, and make settings for echo output.
This field includes the following items.
• Tx button ................... Switches Program Change transmission on or off.
• Rx button ................... Switches Program Change reception on or off.
• ECHO button............ Selects whether incoming Program Changes are echoed-out from the
MIDI transmission port.
MIDI
153
Reference Manual
8.
To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event in the list.
The MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window will appear. In this window, you can specify the event assigned to each program number. This popup window includes the following items.
1 2 3
9.
Use the TYPE field to select the type of event to assign. If the type is other than
SCENE, use the DESTINATION field to select the rack number into which you want to recall the item. Use the LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene or library number that will be recalled.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the
MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window.
NOTE
• You can also select the desired event, scene, or library in this field by pressing it.
• If you press an item in the field to highlight it, you will be able to rotate any of the multifunction knobs to select the event, scene, or library.
10.
Assign events to other program numbers in the same way.
With these settings, executing the specified event on the CL series console will cause the corresponding Program Change (or Bank Select and Program Change) messages to be transmitted to an external device.
When an external device transmits Program Change (or Bank Select and Program Change) messages on the appropriate channel, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding MIDI channel (or bank number) will be executed.
NOTE
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to program numbers. The
INITIALIZE ALL button will return all program number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
• In Single mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one program number on a Tx channel, only the lowest program number will be transmitted. (If the BANK button is on, only the program number of the lowest bank number will be transmitted.)
• In Multi mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one MIDI channel and more than one program number, only the lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
MIDI
1
TYPE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
NO ASSIGN
SCENE
EFFECT
PREMIUM RACK
No assignment
Scene memory recall operations
Effect library recall operations
Premium Rack library recall operations
2 DESTINATION field
Enables you to select the rack for which you want to recall a library item. If EFFECT or
PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is selected, this will indicate “- - -”, and no choice is available for this field.
3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY NAME field
Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall.
If you selected SCENE or EFFECT in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY NUMBER and LIBRARY
NAME field will appear. If you selected PREMIUM RACK in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY
NUMBER field will appear.
154
Reference Manual
MIDI
Using Control Changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the CL series console. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later.
You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
■ Using Control Changes
This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely assign an event to each control number.
■ Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB
(Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed.
NOTE
For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the Appendices (see
1.
Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window.
4.
Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, then select the port and
MIDI channel on which Control Changes will be transmitted and received, as
described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” on page 149
.
5.
Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab to access the CONTROL CHANGE page.
On the CONTROL CHANGE page, you can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. This page includes the following items.
1
3
6
2
4
5
155
1 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify whether
Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
3 List
Shows the event (fader/knob pattern, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.
• NO. .................. Indicates the Control number. You can use Control numbers 1–31, 33–95, and
102–119.
• CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
................... Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to each control number. When you press an event, the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear, allowing you to change the control number assignment.
4 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list.
5 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
6 Scroll knob
Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use a multifunction knob to operate this.
Reference Manual
6.
Use the buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field to select the Control
Change transmission/reception mode.
You can choose one of the following two modes for Control Change transmission/reception.
• NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single
MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments on the list will be ignored.
• TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single
MIDI channel as Control Change messages.
NOTE
The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/
CH field on the MIDI SETUP page (see page 150 ).
7.
Use the buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on or off, and make settings for echo output.
Each button has the following function.
• Tx button....................Switches Control Change transmission on or off.
• Rx button....................Switches Control Change reception on or off.
• ECHO button ............Selects whether incoming Control Changes will be echoed out from the
MIDI transmit port.
8.
To change the event assignment for each control number, press the corresponding event.
The MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear. In this window you can specify the event assigned to each control number. The window contains the following items.
1 MODE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
2 PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event.
NOTE
• The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If NRPN mode is selected as the Control Change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored.
• For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the Appendices
(see
9.
In the order of the MODE field ➔ PARAMETER1 field ➔ PARAMETER2 field, specify the type of event you want to assign.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window.
NOTE
• You can also press the desired event in the field to select it.
• If you press an item in the field to highlight it, you will be able to rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select an event.
10.
Assign events to other control numbers in the same way.
When you operate the parameters you assigned on the CL series console, Control Change messages will be transmitted to external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding Control Change messages are received from an external device on the appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to those control numbers will change.
NOTE
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to control numbers. The INITIALIZE
ALL button will return all control number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
MIDI
1 2
156
Reference Manual
MIDI
Using Parameter Changes to control parameters
On the CL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “Parameter Changes” to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations, system and user settings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or NRPN messages.
For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI data format” in the Appendices.
1.
Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window.
4.
Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, and select the port and
MIDI channel on which Parameter Changes will be transmitted and received, as
described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” on page 149
.
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device.
The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does not match the device number of the receiving CL console, the message will be ignored.
• Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time.
Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other problems.
5.
Use the Tx button and Rx button in the PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on
Parameter Change transmission/reception.
In this state when you operate specific parameters on the CL console, the corresponding
Parameter Change messages will be transmitted. If valid Parameter Change messages are received from an external device, the parameters assigned to those Parameter Changes will be controlled.
157
Reference Manual
User settings (Security)
This chapter explains the following settings and operations: the User Level settings that restrict access to the parameters by certain users, the Console Lock function that temporarily denies access to the console, the Preference settings that customize the operating environment, and Save/Load operations using a USB flash drive.
User Level settings
User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user. Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” inside the console or together on a USB flash drive, allowing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.
• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited.
• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be locked to prevent unintended operations.
• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the CL series console, you must log-in as a user.
• Administrator ...........The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality. Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console.
The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users.
Even if the console was locked by another user, the administrator can use the administrator password to unlock it.
• Guest ...........................A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console.
• User..............................A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in internal memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name. A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level.
When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information.
• Password (except for Guest)
• User Level settings (except for Administrator)
• Preferences
• USER DEFINED keys
• USER DEFINED knobs
• Assignable encoders
• Custom fader bank
• MASTER fader
158
User settings (Security)
Privileges for each user are as follows.
Logged-in user
Editing user setup data, such as USER
DEFINED keys and
Preferences
Editing User
Level settings
Password setting
Editing comments
User authentication key
Create new
Overwritesave
Administrator
User
Power user
Normal user
(User without
Power User privileges)
Available
(Can edit the settings for
Administrator and for Guest.)
Available
(Cannot edit the user level, since the administrator can always perform all operations. Can edit the settings for Guest.)
Available Available
Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
Guest Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
Available —
Available Available Available
Available Available
— Available
Available
—
—
—
Available
Available
(Excluding User
Level settings)
—
Setting the Administrator password
With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log in with
Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
Reference Manual
2.
Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a password.
3.
Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button.
The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the
Administrator password will be set.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
User settings (Security)
Creating a user authentication key
You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console’s internal memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User. The user level is specified when the authentication key is created, but USER SETUP settings other than the user level (such as preferences and the USER DEFINED keys) will be carried over from the user who is currently logged-in.
1.
To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector.
If you want to save the user authentication key in internal memory, simply proceed to step 2.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the CREATE USER KEY button.
159
Reference Manual
1
The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear.
2 3 4
User settings (Security)
4.
When you have specified the user name, comment, password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button.
The CREATE KEY popup window will appear.
5
1 USER NAME
Indicates the user name of up to eight characters. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the user name.
2 COMMENT
Enables you to specify and view a comment of up to 32 characters about the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the comment.
3 PASSWORD
Enables you to specify a password of up to eight characters. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the password.
4 POWER USER
Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user.
5 ACCESS PERMISSION
These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on each item, refer to
.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
5.
If you want to create a user authentication key in the console’s internal memory, press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field.
You can store ten keys in the console’s internal memory.
6.
If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive, press the button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field.
NOTE
The file name of the user authentication key will be the current user name, and it will be created and saved in the root directory.
7.
Press the CREATE TO button.
The user authentication key will be created in the location specified in step 5 or step 6.
160
Reference Manual
Logging-in
To operate the CL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in.
NOTE
If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.
■ Logging-in as Administrator
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN popup window.
User settings (Security)
3.
Press the ADMINISTRATOR button, and then press the LOGIN button.
If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
161
4.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
Reference Manual
■ Logging-in as Guest
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window.
User settings (Security)
■ Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB flash drive.
If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key created on a different CL series console.
With a user authentication key stored in the console
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window.
3.
Press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button.
3.
In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field, choose the user authentication key with which you want to log in, and press the LOAD button.
162
Reference Manual
If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
3.
Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window.
User settings (Security)
4.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive
1.
Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
4.
In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field, click the (LOAD .CLU FILE) popup button.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the files and directories saved on the USB flash drive will be displayed. The user authentication key file has a “.CLU” file name extension.
163
Reference Manual
5.
Rotate the multifunction knob to select the user authentication key for the user as whom you want to log in.
” on
.
6.
Press the LOAD button.
If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
NOTE
• If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different CL series console, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user.
• If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time.
For details on re-saving the user authentication key, refer to “
Editing a user authentication key ” on page 165 .
User settings (Security)
Changing the password
Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. A change in the Administrator password is updated immediately. A change in a User password is also updated immediately, but will be discarded if the user simply logs out after changing it. The change must be saved by overwriting the old authentication key before the user logs-out. The Guest account does not have a password.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a password.
7.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
3.
Enter the current password and press the OK button.
When you enter the correct password, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the new password.
4.
Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the
OK button.
If the two passwords that were entered match, the new password will be set.
164
Reference Manual
User settings (Security)
Editing a user authentication key
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your preference settings, USER DEFINED keys, USER
DEFINED knobs, assignable encoders, custom fader banks, master fader, comments, and password, and save (overwrite) them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
1.
Log-in as a user, and edit the Preference settings (
), USER DEFINED keys
( page 169 ), USER DEFINED knobs (
), assignable encoders (
), custom fader bank (
), and master fader ( page 174 ) settings.
If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
The SAVE KEY popup window will appear.
4.
Press the save-destination button, and then press the SAVE TO button.
5.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you want to overwrite that user authentication key; press OK button.
3.
Press the SAVE KEY button.
165
Reference Manual
Changing the user level
You can view or change the user level.
• Administrator ...........The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can change the user level setting of the Guest account.
• Guest ...........................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest account, but cannot change it.
• Normal user ...............A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her User account, but cannot change it.
• Power User .................A power user can view and change his or her User account.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
User settings (Security)
2.
Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
8
1 2
3
4
6
7
5
3.
Press the USER LEVEL tab to access the USER LEVEL page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can switch to the USER LEVEL for GUEST page, and view or change the user level of the Guest account.
This page includes the following items.
1 CH OPERATION
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currently selected channel.
Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the CH OPERATION section.
Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the Function Access Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings.
The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group.
INPUT channel .............................. [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
MIX/MATRIX channel ................ [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
STEREO/MONO channel ............ [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
DCA group ..................................... [DCA MASTER], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN]
166
Reference Manual
• HA................................................ Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that channel.
• PROCESSING ........................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel (excluding the fader, channel on/off, and send level).
• FADER/ON ................................ Restricts operation of that channel’s fader, channel on/off, and send level.
• WITH SEND ............................. Restricts operation of that channel’s send parameters. (From
MIX, From MATRIX)
• DCA MASTER .......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s DCA group fader, ON/
OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME.
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN............ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group.
• SET BY SEL................................ If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of a channel to enable or disable the operating restrictions for that channel.
2 CURRENT SCENE
Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory.
• INPUT PATCH/INPUT NAME.................. Restricts operations for input channel patching and names.
• OUTPUT PATCH/OUTPUT NAME......... Restricts operations for output channel patching and names.
• BUS SETUP................................ Restricts operations for bus setup.
• GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK
........................................ Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open the
RACK USER LEVEL popup window, in which you can set this restriction. However, there will be no restriction on operating the MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button displayed for the FREEZE effect.
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP MASTER
........................................ Restricts operations for mute group assignment and mute group master.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3 SCENE LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories.
• STORE/SORT operations
• RECALL operations
4 LIBRARY LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries.
• STORE/CLEAR operations
• RECALL operations
167
User settings (Security)
5 FILE LOAD
Specifies the settings that will be applied when a file is loaded from a USB flash drive. The user authentication key contains settings such as the user level, preferences, and the USER DEFINED key settings (USER SETUP settings). Other data is saved in an “ALL” file. The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest.
• USER SETUP (Preference and USER DEFINED keys settings)
• SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP
• CURRENT SCENE
• SCENE LIST
• LIBRARY LIST
6 MONITOR SETUP
Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed.
• OSCILLATOR
• TALKBACK
7 SYSTEM SETUP
Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed.
• MIXER SETUP
• OUTPUT PORT
• MIDI/GPI
8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button
Permits/clears all items.
4.
Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted.
5.
When you have finished making settings, close the popup window and press the
SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
Reference Manual
168
Reference Manual
• POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED
Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a popup window (1ch) to appear. If the ON button is lit, a popup window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob.
NOTE
If you press the SEND or PAN knob, a popup window (8ch) will open.
• GAIN KNOB FUNCTION
Specifies what will happen when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the panel. When the ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust analog gain on the head amp. When the DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital gain on the console.
• SCENE UP/DOWN
Specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys will do when pressed in the SCENE popup windows.
When the SCENE +1/–1 button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will increment or decrement the scene number.
When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will scroll the list upward or downward.
• LIST ORDER
Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list.
When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When the
REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order.
• NAME DISPLAY
Specifies the content of the channel name display on the top panel.
When the NAME ONLY button is lit, only the channel name appears. When the FULL
FUNCTION button is lit, the channel name display also indicates knob assignment information and fader level.
4.
Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings.
5.
When you have finished making settings, close the popup window and press the
SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
USER DEFINED keys
User settings (Security)
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the USER
DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and press these keys to execute the defined function.
This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED keys for the user who is currently loggedin, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER
DEFINED key settings for the Guest account.
The sixteen buttons on screen corresponds to USER DEFINED keys [1]–[16] on the top panel.
The name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding on-screen button. If nothing is assigned to the key, an indication of “---” will appear next to the button.
169
Reference Manual
4.
Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window will appear. In this window, you can select a function to assign to the USER DEFINED key, and select the parameters.
NOTE
The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
5.
Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then use the / buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign.
” on
.
6.
If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, and select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7.
Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window.
8.
Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way.
9.
To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[16] key on the panel.
User settings (Security)
Using the Alternate function
If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key to which the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light).
The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH.
If you select UNLATCH, Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key. If you select LATCH, you will be able to turn Alternate mode on or off by the key presses. You do not need to hold down the key.
NOTE
• The console exits Alternate mode when you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or when you open a popup window.
• In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area.
In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior.
• [GAIN] knob
Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for HA
KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP popup window, rotate this knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp.
• [MIX/MATRIX] knob
Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal.
Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off.
• [HPF] knob
Press this knob to switch the high pass filter on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 1] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 2] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off.
NOTE
In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs mentioned above will be disabled.
170
Reference Manual
User settings (Security)
USER DEFINED knobs
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the USER
DEFINED KNOBS section on the top panel, and press these knobs to execute the defined function.
This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED knobs for the user who is currently loggedin, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS for Guest page and make USER
DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
The four on-screen buttons correspond to USER DEFINED knobs [1]–[4] on the top panel. The name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding onscreen button. If nothing is assigned to the knob, an indication of “---” will appear next to the button.
4.
Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to assign a function.
The USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window will appear. In this window you can select a function to assign to the USER DEFINED knob, and select the parameters.
171
NOTE
The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
5.
Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then use the / buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign.
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs
” on
.
6.
If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7.
Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window.
8.
Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED knobs in the same way.
9.
To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[4] knob on the panel.
About TOUCH AND TURN
The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED [4] knob by default. If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs, you can press a desired knob on the touch screen and then use the USER DEFINED knob to immediately operate that on-screen knob.
At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen, indicating that you can operate that knob.
Reference Manual
Assignable encoders
You can assign the desired function to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each channel, and control the function using the knob.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
4.
Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field.
The ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP popup window will appear.
User settings (Security)
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page, and make assignable knob settings for the Guest account.
5.
Use the / buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign.
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders ” on page 263 .
NOTE
SELECTED SEND is the default setting. It functions as the send to the MIX/MATRIX channel that is selected for SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area.
6.
Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window.
7.
Press the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key on the top panel repeatedly to select ASSIGN.
The CL3 and CL1 feature one [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key. Therefore, the function of all GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knobs will change simultaneously.
On the CL5, you can switch the knob function in block A (left side) and block C/Master fader section (right side) independently by using the corresponding [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys.
NOTE
This assignment does not apply to the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section, since these knobs are used to control on-screen parameters.
8.
Operate the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on each fader strip.
172
Reference Manual
Custom fader bank
Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.”
There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types. This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3
4
5
1
2
6
User settings (Security)
2 MASTER FADER field
• MASTER button
Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader section.
3 Block indicators
Display the graphics of the block and faders that are the current target for editing.
The graphics vary depending on the console model.
CL5: A (16 faders), B, C, MASTER
CL3: A (16 faders), B, MASTER
CL1: A (8 faders), B, MASTER
4 Fader select button
Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press the [SEL] keys on the top panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank.
5 Channel select popup button
Opens the channel select popup window, in which you can change the channel specified for
CHANNEL ASSIGN.
6 CLEAR ALL button
Clears the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen without changing the setting.
4.
Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels you want to add to the custom fader bank.
5.
Press the bank select button for the custom fader bank you want to set up.
3.
Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank settings for the Guest account.
This page includes the following items.
1
CUSTOM FADER BANK field
• Bank select buttons
Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of channels.
The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console model.
CL5: A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
CL3: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2
CL1: A1, B1, B2, B3, B4
173
6.
In the CHANNEL ASSIGN field, press the number button for the fader you want to set up.
7.
On the top panel, press the [SEL] key of the channel that you want to assign to that fader number.
The name of the selected channel will appear on the channel select popup button.
Reference Manual
8.
To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
If necessary, select channels by pressing the channel select popup buttons.
User settings (Security)
Master fader
You can set channels that will be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group, then use the buttons in the right column to select channels.
When you have finished selecting the channels, press the CLOSE button.
3.
Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make master fader settings for the Guest account.
4.
Press the MASTER button.
The CHANNEL ASSIGN field shows the channel assignments of the master section.
174
Reference Manual
5.
Press the channel select popup button of the fader (A or B) that you want to edit, and choose the channel.
User settings (Security)
Console Lock
You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controllers cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break.
If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console Lock function.
NOTE
• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the unit to the factory default settings” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
• The Guest cannot set a password.
• Even while the console is locked, you can operate the console from an external device via MIDI or CL Editor as usual.
Locking the console
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group, then use the buttons in the right column to select channels. When you have finished selecting the channels, press the CLOSE button.
2.
Press the CONSOLE LOCK button.
175
Reference Manual
3.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
Enter the password for the logged-in user, and press the OK button.
The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Console Lock function will be enabled, and all controllers (excluding the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will become inoperable.
User settings (Security)
Unlocking the console
1.
Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
2.
Enter the password for the logged-in user or for the Administrator, and press the
OK button.
The console will be unlocked, you will return to the SETUP screen, and the controllers will be operable once again.
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image
If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
In the SAVE/LOAD popup window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “
Loading a file from the USB flash drive
” on
.
NOTE
Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be converted into 16-bit for display.
176
Reference Manual
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive
This section explains how to connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive.
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives.
• The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in
FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
NOTICE
An ACCESS indicator appears in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved, loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB plug or power-off the CL unit.
Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive.
Saving the CL console’s internal data on a USB flash drive
All of the CL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file. The saved file will have an extension of “.CLF”.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
User settings (Security)
2.
Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3.
If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
4.
Press the SAVE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a file name and comment.
5.
Enter a file name or comment, and press the SAVE button.
When the file has been saved, the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progress of the writing operation will close.
NOTE
• If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog will ask you to confirm the overwrite.
• You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
• You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name, and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you will be unable to save the file. If an error message appears at the bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again.
177
Reference Manual
Loading a file from the USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to load CL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into the CL series console.
You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as setting files.
Extension
.CLF
.CLU
.XML
.TXT
.BMP
ALL
KEY
Type
XML
TEXT
BMP
Contents of file
CL console internal setting file
CL console user authentication key
XML file for displaying Help
Text file for displaying Help
Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more colors, uncompressed bitmap format)
NOTICE
Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after the data is loaded. Therefore, before loading data, turn off the power to the equipment connected to the CL series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the CL console.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
User settings (Security)
6.
Press the OK button to begin loading the file.
When the file has finished loading, the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progress of the loading operation will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data up to the cancellation point will still be loaded.
Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load operation.
Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive
This section explains how to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on the
USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting.
■ File editing
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved.
5 1 2 3 4 6
7
3.
To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file list, or rotate the corresponding multifunction knob on the panel.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations.
4.
If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF) to be applied to the CL console, press the
WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on.
5.
Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear.
178
8 9 0 C A B
1
COPY button
Copies a file into buffer memory (a temporary holding area).
2
PASTE button
Pastes the file from buffer memory.
3
DELETE button
Deletes the selected file or directory.
NOTE
A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear.
Reference Manual
4 MAKE DIR button
Creates a new directory.
5 PATH
Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed.
6 VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE
Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive.
If the USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME field.
7 File list
This area lists the files that are saved on the USB flash drive.
The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations.
The file list contains the following items. When you press the item name at the top of each column, it will turn orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• FILE NAME ...............Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon indicating its type.
• COMMENT ...............The comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed here.
• READ ONLY..............A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting.
• TYPE ...........................ALL indicates a file containing CL internal settings, KEY indicates a user authentication key, XML indicates a Help file, BMP indicates a bitmap image file, MP3 indicates an MP3 file, and [DIR] indicates a directory.
• TIME STAMP............Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most recently.
8 File selection knob
Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob.
9 SAVE button
Saves all of the CL console internal settings together (see page 177
).
0 LOAD button
Loads the selected CL setting file (see
A CREATE USER KEY button
Creates a user authentication key (see
B FORMAT button
Initializes the USB flash drive (see
).
C WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button
If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings will be omitted when a settings file is loaded.
NOTE
The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even if the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is on.
3.
Perform the desired editing operation.
For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations that follow.
■ Sorting files and editing file names/comments
User settings (Security)
1.
To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ
ONLY,” “TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the file list.
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
1 2 3 4 5
1
FILE NAME
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names.
2
COMMENT
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment.
3
READ ONLY
Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status.
4
TYPE
Sort the list by file type.
5
TIME STAMP
Sort the list by date and time of update.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or descending order) in which the list is sorted.
2.
If you want to edit the file name or comment, press the FILE NAME field or
COMMENT field of each file to access the keyboard window.
3.
Enter a file name or comment, and press the RENAME button or SET button.
4.
To turn the protect setting on or off, press the READ ONLY field for the file.
A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected files. These files cannot be overwritten.
NOTE
You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file.
179
Reference Manual
■ Copying and pasting a file
Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file name.
1.
Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY button.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations.
2.
If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
3.
Press the PASTE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the file name.
4.
Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button.
NOTE
You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.
■ Deleting a file
1.
Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete operation.
2.
To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
You cannot delete a protected file.
■ Creating a directory
1.
If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
2.
Press the MAKE DIR button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a directory name.
3.
Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button.
NOTE
You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.
Formatting a USB flash drive
User settings (Security)
Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive.
A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3.
Press the FORMAT button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the volume name that will be applied after formatting.
4.
Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format operation.
5.
To execute the Format operation, press the OK button.
180
Reference Manual
Recorder
This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder.
About the USB memory recorder
The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash drive.
As the file format for recording, the CL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3). For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) files.
However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported.
By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on a USB flash drive can be played back via an assigned input channel.
■ Signal flow for the USB memory recorder
MIX1-24
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
INPUT1-72*
DIRECT OUT
RECORDER
INPUT
L
R
USB memory recorder
L
PLAYBACK
OUT
R
INPUT1-72*
ST IN 1L1R-8L8R
* CL3: INPUT1-64, CL1: INPUT1-48
NOTE
• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.
Recorder
Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder
Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen.
2.
Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen.
On this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder, and perform recording and playback operations.
181
1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5
1 RECORDER INPUT popup buttons (L/R)
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R input channels.
2
RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder.
3
RECORDER INPUT CUE button
Press this button to audition the signal input to the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously.
Reference Manual
4 RECORDER INPUT meters
Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder.
5 PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons (L/R)
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R output channels for playback.
6 PLAYBACK OUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the recorder playback output signal.
7 PLAYBACK OUT CUE button
Press this button to audition the signal output from the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously.
8 PLAYBACK OUT meters
Indicates the level of the recorder playback output signal.
3.
To assign channels to the recorder inputs, press the RECORDER INPUT popup button L or R.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear.
Recorder
• ST L+C ....................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel
• ST R+C ....................... STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO (C) channel
• MONO........................ MONO channel
• CH1–72 ...................... Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–72
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4.
Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
If you select a channel to which a channel is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
5.
When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the RECORDER screen.
6.
Assign a channel to the other input in the same way.
NOTE
The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to the same channel.
7.
To assign channels to the recorder playback outputs, press the PLAYBACK OUT popup button L or R.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear.
2
1
2
1
1 Category list
Enables you to select the type of channels.
2 Channel select buttons
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s inputs.
• MIX 1–24....................MIX channels 1–24
• MTRX 1–8..................MATRIX channels 1–8
• ST L/R .........................STEREO channel L/R
182
1
Category List
Enables you to select the type of channels.
Reference Manual
2 Channel select buttons
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s playback outputs, from the following choices.
• CH1–72....................................... INPUT channels 1–72
• STIN 1L/1R–STIN 8L/8R ........ ST IN channels 1–8 L/R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
8.
Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
If you select a channel to which another signal is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
NOTE
The recorder playback output can be patched to multiple channels.
9.
When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the RECORDER screen.
10.
Assign a channel to the other output in the same way.
Recorder
Recording audio to a USB flash drive
You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen.
2.
Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen.
1
2 C
B
7 8 9 0 A 3 4 5 6
■ TRANSPORT field
This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song.
1
Current song
Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following indicators will appear during playback or recording.
Playing Recording
183
2 Elapsed time display
Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the elapsed recording time during recording.
Reference Manual
3 Remaining time display
Indicates the remaining playback time of the current song during playback.
4 Current song format
Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song (the file being played back).
5 REC RATE button
Switches the recording rate.
6 Display switch button
Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT and PLAYBACK OUT fields at the bottom of the song list.
7 REW button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song. If the playback point has already been located at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of the preceding song that has been checked for playback.
When the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released.
8 STOP button
The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode.
9 PLAY/PAUSE button
Changes the recorder mode as follows:
Stop mode → Playback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current song
Playback mode → Playback pause mode
Playback pause mode → Playback mode, then starts playback from the paused point.
Recording standby mode → Recording mode
Recording mode → Recording-pause mode
Recording pause mode → Recording mode, then starts recording from the paused point.
0 FF button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY check symbol.
If you hold down this button for two seconds or longer, fast-forward will occur.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released.
A REC button
Places the recorder in recording standby mode.
The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will light.
NOTE
You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key (see
).
Recorder
■ PLAY MODE field
This field enables you to specify how the recorder will behave when playback of the current song is complete.
B SINGLE button
If this button is on, only the current song will play.
If this button is off, when the current song finishes playing, the recorder will play the next song in the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol.
C REPEAT button
If this button is on, playback will repeat. If the SINGLE button is on, only the current song will play repeatedly. If the SINGLE button is off, all songs in the list that are marked with a PLAY check symbol will repeatedly play in the order of the list.
If this is off, the song will play only once. If the SINGLE button is on, the current song will play only once, and then stop. If the SINGLE button is off, all songs in the list that are marked with a
PLAY check symbol will play once in the order of the list, and then playback will stop.
3.
Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector.
The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity. When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently-selected folder below that level.
■ Directory structure of a USB flash drive
YPE folder
Root directory
Songs folder
Song (audio file)
184
4.
Assign the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder
Reference Manual
5.
To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are patched to the input of the recorder.
The level of the input signal to the recorder is shown by the RECORDER INPUT field’s level meter in the RECORDER screen. If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder.
NOTE
• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).
• Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel.
6.
Press the REC RATE field in the lower right of the screen, then select the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded.
You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but will increase the size of the data.
NOTE
The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be selected as the sampling rate for the audio file.
7.
Press the REC ( ●) button.
The REC ( ●) button and the PAUSE ( ) indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE (
The current song indicator area will show “----RECORDING----.”
) button will light.
8.
To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
During recording, the REC (
●) button and the PLAY ( ) indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( button will light. You can also see the elapsed recording time.
)
9.
To stop recording, press the STOP ( ■) button.
The audio file will be saved to the USB flash drive.
NOTE
• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. You may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder.
• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later.
10.
To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.
10–1. Select a recorded audio file, and press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
The recorded content will be played back via the input channel you specified in step 4.
You can also turn on the CUE button in the PLAYBACK OUT field to audition it.
10–2. To stop playback, press the STOP ( ■) button.
2
4
Recorder
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files that were recorded on the CL series console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the
USB flash drive.
The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA (Windows
Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps.
1.
Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
NOTE
If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen.
3 5 1
A
0
185
6 7 8 9
1 Title list
This list shows the playable audio files and the folders that are saved in the selected folder of USB flash drive. The row with the blue background in the center of the list indicates the song file/folder that is selected for operations.
Reference Manual
2 Status indicator
A symbol indicating whether the file is playing or paused is shown at the left edge of the title list.
: Playing, : Paused
3 Track number
Indicates the file number on the list.
4 Sub-directory
If there is a folder at a lower level, a folder icon is shown at the track number position. You can move to the lower level by pressing the folder icon.
5 PLAY check symbol
Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively.
6 SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knob to switch the current song. (The title list will scroll up or down.)
7 NOW PLAYING button
If you turn this button on, the currently-playing song will always be selected in the list (it will have a blue background).
8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
Sort the current song list in descending or ascending order.
9 Display switch buttons
Switch between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display on the list.
0 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol setting as a playlist.
A RELOAD button
Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current playlist you are editing back to the previous setting.
3.
You can use the change directory button on screen and the folder icon in the NO. column to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file.
If the directory on the USB flash drive is displayed:
• Upper level .................Press this button to move up to the directory that is one level higher than the current one.
Recorder
• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the SONGS folder.
• The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters.
If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly.
• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories can be managed.
4.
Use the multifunction knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired file.
5.
Press a button in the PLAY MODE to select the playback mode.
You can choose from the following four playback modes.
SINGLE button
On
On
REPEAT button
On
Off
Mode
Off
Off
On
Off
The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
The currently-selected song will play once and then stop.
Starting with the currently-selected song on the title list, songs will play back consecutively until the last song. Then, playback will return to the first song and will continue until you stop playback.
Starting with the currently-selected song in the title list, songs will play back consecutively, and playback will stop at the last song on the list.
6.
If you have selected a consecutive playback mode in step 5, press the PLAY check symbol column for each song you want to play.
When performing consecutive playback, the files marked with a check symbol will be played.
7.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing.
NOTE
• The USB memory recorder can play back audio files that feature a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz or
48 kHz.
• Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly.
• If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback.
8.
To stop playback, press the STOP ( ■) button.
• Subdirectory ..............Press this button to move to the corresponding sub-directory.
NOTE
• If you select a folder in this way, that folder will automatically be selected as the recording destination.
186
Reference Manual
Editing the title list
You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names.
1.
Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen (USB tab).
3 4
1
2
5
6
1
SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button
Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list. The file name cannot be edited here.
2
ARTIST EDIT button
Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list.
3
SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the title or file name.
4
ARTIST SORT button
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the artist name.
5
SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings to a USB flash drive as a playlist.
Recorder
6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button
Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/FILE
NAME field.
3.
In the screen, you can use the folder icon in the NO. column and the change directory button to view the contents of the folder that includes the desired file.
4.
If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button.
A popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the text.
NOTE
• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be converted into for display.
• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files.
5.
Edit the title or artist name.
A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the title and for the artist name. If the text cannot be shown completely in the input field, the text will scroll horizontally.
6.
Press the OK button to close the popup window.
7.
If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button, and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list.
Use the following buttons to change the order of the title list.
• SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Press this button to sort the title list in numerical → alphabetical order by title/file name. Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• ARTIST SORT button
Press this button to sort the title list in numerical → alphabetical order by artist name. Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
Press these buttons to move the track number of the file currently-selected in the title list upward or downward by one.
• SAVE LIST button
Press this button to store the title list order and playback selections (the PLAY check symbol) to a USB flash drive as a play list. You should perform this operation if you want the state of the title list to be preserved even after you disconnect the USB flash drive or turn off the power to the console.
Since these settings are stored for each folder, a confirmation dialog box will ask you whether you want to save them when you attempt to change folders.
187
Reference Manual
Using the CL console with Nuendo Live
The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg’s Nuendo Live DAW software.
In addition to the equipment and software mentioned in “
Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer ” on page 25
, the “CL Extension” software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console to easily perform multi-track recording operations.
Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console.
Preparing the project
Make the following settings as described in “ Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer
” on
1.
Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard or Dante Accelerator
Specify the audio format, network settings, and ASIO driver settings so that Dante Virtual
Soundcard (DVS) or Dante Accelerator (DANTE-ACCEL) can be used.
2.
Setting up Dante Controller
Use Dante Controller to patch between the I/O device and DVS, and between DVS and the CL series console. Assign the signals from the I/O device to the various input ports of DVS. Patching can also be specified from the CL series console.
NOTE
Separately, route the signals from I/O devices to the channels on the CL series console. (see
Recorder
The following example shows Dante Controller settings for patching I/O device channels 1–16 to
DVS.
In this case, the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console must be switched when changing between multi-track recording and multi-track playback. Switching will be easy if
you’ve stored the respective settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY (see page 139 ).
3.
Setting up Nuendo Live
When you start Nuendo Live and create a new project, a track for each channel specified for DVS will be created automatically. In addition, the tracks will automatically use the channel names and color information as specified on the CL series console.
Make the following settings in Nuendo Live.
• In Setup button → Audio System, select DVS or DANTE-ACCEL as the driver.
NOTE
For details on the settings of each software program, refer to the manual for that software.
188
Reference Manual
Recorder
Recording into a project
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen.
2.
Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the screen.
The Nuendo Live screen will appear.
G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 8 9 0 A B
The screen shows the following items.
C
1 Nuendo meter display field
This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live.
D H E I F
2 PEAK CLEAR button
Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function.
3 Marker list field
Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project.
The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the multifunction knobs.
4
Nuendo Live SETUP button
Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live.
(see
)
5 DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen (see page 138
).
189
6 Location information display
This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can press the button at the right to switch the time display format.
7 GO TO PROJECT START button
Returns the location to the start of the project.
8 GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button
Returns the location to the previous marker.
9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button
Advances the location to the next marker.
0 GO TO PROJECT END button
Advances the location to the end of the project.
A CYCLE button
Turns repeat on/off for the project.
B STOP button
Stops playback/recording of the project.
C PLAY button
Starts playback of the project.
D RECORD button
Starts/stops recording of the project.
E EASY RECORDING button
Immediately starts recording all tracks.
Pressing this button will reset the current location to the end point of the latest recording, place all tracks in recording mode, start recording, and then display and lock the recording panel.
Recording will start retroactively by the specified time duration (default: 10 seconds).
F Record lock button
Turns recording status lock on/off.
This prevents recording from being accidentally stopped during recording.
G DVS information display
Shows the device label of the selected DVS.
H ADD MARKER button
Adds a marker to the project at the current location.
I
RECALL LINK button
Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is turned on, the button will be lit.
NOTE
Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys. (see
)
Reference Manual
3.
Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording.
4.
When you have finished recording, press the record lock button and then the STOP button.
Specifying DVS or DANTE-ACCEL
1.
In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button.
The NUENDO LIVE SETUP popup window will appear.
NOTE
• Even if the CL’s CONSOLE ID is set to something other than #1, you can still specify DVS or
DANTE-ACCEL in the NUENDO Live SETUP screen.
• However, you must not select the same DVS or DANTE-ACCEL from more than one CL console.
Recorder
■ When setup method selection button = DVS
To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
1
1
2
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live.
2
DEVICE LIST select knob
Operate the multi-function knob to choose the DVS that you want to select.
1 Setup method selection buttons
Use these buttons to select one of the following methods to specify DVS or DANTE-ACCEL.
• NO ASSIGN............................... Not assigned
• DVS ............................................. Select a DVS from the device list
• SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS ...... When using DANTE-ACCEL, specify the IP address of the PC
190
Reference Manual
■ When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS
If you’re using DANTE-ACCEL, use the SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS field to specify the IP address of the
PC. Since the IP address of DANTE-ACCEL will differ from the IP address used by CL Extension, you must specify the IP address manually.
Recorder
NOTE
Depending on the firmware version, DANTE-ACCEL might not support redundant networking.
Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the DANTE-ACCEL (Dante
Accelerator) firmware supports redundant networking.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the
NUENDO LIVE SET UP popup window.
1
This screen contains the following items.
1
IP ADDRESS knobs
Use the multifunction knobs to specify the IP address.
NOTE
• As the IP address, specify the IP address of the PC that is running Nuendo Live.
• Set the address of that PC in the range of 169.254.0.0 – 169.254.255.255, and set the subnet mask as 255.255.0.0.
• For the PC in which DANTE-ACCEL is installed, the Dante port of DANTE-ACCEL as well as the
Ethernet port of the PC must both be connected to the same network.
Refer to the illustration below.
PC SW
(Primary)
Ethernet
DANTE-ACCEL P
S
CL
Dante
P
S
SW
(Secondary)
191
Reference Manual
Recorder
Playing a multi-track project
1.
In the Nuendo Live screen, press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button.
2.
Assign the signals from Nuendo Live to the desired DANTE1–DANTE64 ports.
For example, press the PORT SELECT button for DANTE1.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
3.
In the list at the left, select the DVS you’re using with Nuendo Live, and select the port that you want to assign to DANTE1.
4.
Press the + button located in the upper part of the screen to switch to DANTE2, and assign a DVS port to it in the same way.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the screen.
6.
Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close it.
NOTE
If you’ve saved the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library, it will be easy to switch the
settings on the CL series console (see page 139 ).
7.
In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button.
8.
Operate the channels so that sound is output.
9.
To stop playback, press the STOP button.
192
Reference Manual
Help function
You can view Help files provided by Yamaha, or display any user-created text file.
We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha.
Loading a Help file from a USB flash drive
NOTE
A help file for only one language is stored in the console’s internal memory. Once you load the help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off.
The first time you press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the help file to be loaded from internal memory. It is not possible to read from internal memory while the USB flash drive is being accessed, including while the recorder is recording or playing back, and therefore Help cannot be displayed during this time.
Once the data has finished loading, subsequently pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly.
1.
Before you proceed, save the Help file (file extension: .xml) provided by Yamaha on your USB flash drive. For the latest information on help files, refer to the
Yamaha Pro Audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
Help function
4.
To select the Help file (file extension: .xml) that you want to load, press one of the
Help files in the file list, or turn the multifunction knob on the panel.
5.
Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear.
6.
Press the OK button to load the file.
Loading a text file from a USB flash drive
1.
Using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with
Microsoft Windows, create a text file (file extension: .txt) and save it on your USB flash drive.
By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file.
The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets/languages).
• Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)
• Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese)
• Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set.
The maximum size of the text file is 1024 Kbytes.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
4.
To select the text file you want to load, press one of the text files in the file list or turn the multifunction knob on the panel.
5.
Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear.
6.
Press the OK button to load the file.
193
Reference Manual
Viewing Help
1.
Before you proceed, load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the popup window.
(Help) button to access the HELP
Help function
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly
1.
Before you proceed, load the Help file from your USB flash drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
By turning multifunction knobs 1–2 you can scroll the index area at the left. By turning multifunction knobs 3–8 you can scroll the main area at the right.
4.
By pressing a link (underlined text) in the text, you can scroll to the linked destination.
By pressing a window link (a location with an → symbol and underlined text), you can close the
HELP popup window and open the corresponding window.
5.
You can also scroll by using the buttons in the tool bar as needed.
• button................Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-displayed location.
•
•
button................Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed.
button................Proceeds to the subsequent item in the history of links you pressed.
6.
To close the window, press the (Help) button of the Function Access Area or the “x” symbol of the HELP popup window.
3.
In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
194
Reference Manual
4.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
5.
Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function.
6.
In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button.
7.
When you have finished assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys, press the × symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
Help function
■ Recalling the HELP popup window using only a USER DEFINED key
9.
Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP popup window will appear.
10.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller
9.
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help.
Panel controllers (other than the faders) will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
10.
If the corresponding controller has an explanation associated with it, the HELP popup window will appear, and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item.
If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat step 9 to successively display these explanations.
11.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen
9.
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help.
The on-screen buttons and tabs will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER
DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
10.
If there is a corresponding Help item, the HELP popup window will appear and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item.
If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, close the HELP popup window and then repeat step 9 to successively view these explanations.
11.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
195
Reference Manual
A
9
0
C
Other functions
This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other chapters.
About the SETUP screen
The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console. To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The screen contains the following items.
1 3 2 54 6 7
8
B
D
E
G
F
H I J
■ CURRENT USER field
This field enables you to make various user-related settings.
1
USER SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the USER SETUP popup window, in which you can make various settings for each user.
2 CURRENT USER popup button
Press this button to open the LOG IN popup window, in which you can switch log-in users.
Other functions
3 COMMENT EDIT popup button
Press this button to open the USER COMMENT EDIT popup window, in which you can enter comments.
4 PASSWORD CHANGE popup button
Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE popup window, in which you can change the password.
5 SAVE KEY popup button
Enables you to save the user authentication key. Press this button to open the SAVE KEY popup
■ STORAGE field
This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key.
6 CREATE USER KEY popup button
Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY popup window, in which you can create a new user authentication key.
7 SAVE/LOAD popup button
Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD popup window, in which you can save or load user authentication keys and console files.
■ SYSTEM SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the CL console.
8 +48V MASTER button
Switches the console’s master +48V master phantom power on or off. If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an OMNI jack input channel or
TALKBACK IN is on.
NOTE
This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs
(I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.
9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup button
Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window, in which you can make word clock settings and various settings for each slot.
0 CASCADE popup button
Press this button to open the CASCADE popup window, in which you can make patch settings for cascade connections.
A OUTPUT PORT popup button
Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window, in which you can make output port settings.
196
Reference Manual
B MIDI/GPI popup button
Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI popup window, in which you can make MIDI and GPIrelated settings.
C DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window. This window enables you to make various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality setting; audio bit rate; latency setting; selections for devices controlled via the I/O DEVICE screen).
■ BUS SETUP field
This field enables you to make bus-related settings.
D BUS SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the BUS SETUP popup window, in which you can make MIX bus/
MATRIX bus-related settings.
■ DATE/TIME popup button
Press this button to open the DATE/TIME popup window, in which you can set the date and time.
■ NETWORK popup button
Press this button to open the NETWORK popup window, in which you can set the network address.
■ Indicator field
This field displays various information about the console’s status.
E BATTERY indicator
Indicates the status of the internal battery.
NOTE
The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual
(separate document) to have the backup battery replaced.
F POWER SUPPLY indicator
Indicates the currently-running power supply: INT (internal) or EXT (PW800).
G Version indicator
Indicates the version number of the main CPU, sub CPU, and DANTE module.
■ CONSOLE LOCK button
This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set, pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION popup window. Enter the correct password to execute
Console Lock.
If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute the Console Lock immediately.
Other functions
■ CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field
This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast.
H BANK A/BANK B buttons
Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can save two different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired.
I CONTRAST NAME knob
Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display.
J BRIGHTNESS NAME knob
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob
Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob
Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs.
BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob
Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector.
197
Reference Manual
Word clock and slot settings
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. To send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must be synchronized to the same word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data may not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.
Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master.
If you wish to use the CL series console as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which the word clock is obtained).
This section explains how to select the clock source that the CL series console will use.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
Other functions
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field at the center of the screen, press the WORD CLOCK/
SLOT SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP popup window.
This popup window contains the following items.
1
2
3
198
■ MASTER CLOCK SELECT field
1 Master clock frequency display
Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If the unit is not synching to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.
NOTE
If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante
Controller application, this area indicates the change in the sample rate as a percentage, such as –4.0%, –0.1%, +4.0%,
4.1667%, etc.
2 Master clock select buttons
Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master from the following options:
• INT 48 k
• INT 44.1 k
The CL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock source.
• WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source.
Reference Manual
• DANTE 48 k
• DANTE 44.1 k
The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source.
• SLOT 1–3
The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as the clock source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot.
3 Clock status display
Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each indicator is explained below:
• LOCK (light blue)
Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring properly between that device and the CL series console. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
• LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)
A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series console.
• SRC ON (green)
This is a special status applied only to SLOT 1–3, indicating that the corresponding channel’s SRC
(Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This means that even if the signal is not synchronized, normal input/output with the CL series console is occurring.
• UNLOCK (red)
A valid clock is being input, but the CL series console is not synchronized to the selected clock.
If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, it will be unable to communicate properly with the CL console.
• UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established.
If the indicator for the port selected as the clock source has turned light blue, and the clock frequency appears in the upper left of the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field, this indicates that the
CL series console is operating correctly with the new clock.
NOTE
• If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
199
Other functions
■ SLOT SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the console.
1
3
2
4
1
Card name
Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.
2
SRC buttons
The SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear.
3
FREQUENCY display
Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
4
EMPHASIS STATUS display
Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
3.
In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field, select a clock source.
4.
To close the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right.
You will return to the SETUP screen.
5.
To close the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
Reference Manual
Using cascade connections
Using multiple CL series consoles, or a CL console and an external mixing console (such as a Yamaha
PM5D) in a cascade connection enable buses to be shared among the devices. This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two CL units are connected in a cascade configuration.
About cascade connections
To cascade two CL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of the receiving unit
(the cascade master).
The following illustration shows an example in which three eight-channel digital I/O cards for each unit are installed in the cascade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit. The DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.
Audio signals of unit A
DIGITAL
OUT
Audio signals of
A + B
DIGITAL
IN
Other functions
Operations on a cascade slave CL unit
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen, press the
CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window.
This window enables you to select an I/O port used for cascade connections. The window consists of two pages: The CASCADE IN PATCH page and the CASCADE OUT PATCH page. To switch pages, press the corresponding tab at the bottom of the window.
3.
Press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab to access the CASCADE OUT PATCH page.
In this screen you can select the slot and output port that will output each bus.
2
3
CL A
(Cascade slave)
CL B
(Cascade master)
1
Digital I/O card
In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1–24, MATRIX bus 1–8, STEREO bus
(L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master CL unit. (If you use three 16-ch digital I/O cards, all buses can be shared among the devices.)
You must specify bus assignments for each or channel on each CL unit. Separate procedures are outlined below for the cascade slave and the cascade master.
NOTE
• If you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D, you can use the CL unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However, only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.
• You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at the cascade slave will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master.
200
1 Port select popup buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section)
Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–
8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a port.
2 CASCADE LINK MODE buttons
Specify whether only cue operations will be linked, or all linkable operations including scene store/recall operations will also be linked when CL series consoles are cascade-connected.
3
CASCADE COMM PORT buttons
Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information when operations such as cue and scene store/recall are linked between cascade-connected CL series consoles.
Reference Manual
4.
Press the port select popup button for the bus for which you want to assign the
1 port.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
2
This popup window contains the following items.
1
Category select list
Selects the port (slot 1–3) that will be shown on the screen.
2
Port select buttons
Within the specified slot, these buttons select the ports that will be patched.
5.
Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and output ports, and then press the CLOSE button.
The port will be assigned to the selected bus.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses.
NOTE
You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled.
Other functions
7.
If you want to use the Cascade Link function to link parameters and events between two CL consoles, proceed as follows.
7–1. Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link.
You can choose from the following items.
• NONE .......... No link operation
• MIDI............ Use MIDI port
• SLOT1 ......... Use SLOT1
NOTE
Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
7–2. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
You can choose from the following items.
• OFF
No link operation
• CUE
The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked.
• Cue enable/disable
• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE)
• Cue point settings for input channels and output channels
• ALL
All linkable parameters and events (including cue-related parameters) will be linked.
• Cue-related parameters and events (see above)
• Scene recall operations
• Scene store operations
• DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations
• Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP screen) operations
• Master mute group operations
8.
To close the CASCADE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
201
Reference Manual
Operations on the cascade master CL unit
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen, press the
CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window.
3.
Press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab to access the CASCADE IN PATCH page.
4.
Press the port select popup button for the bus to which you want to assign a port.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
5.
Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and input ports, and then press the CLOSE button.
The port will be assigned to the selected bus.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses.
If desired, you can assign two or more buses to the same input port.
7.
If you want to link specific parameters or events between two CL series consoles, proceed as follows.
7–1. Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link.
The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window
(see
).
NOTE
Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
7–2. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window
(see
).
8.
To close the CASCADE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
In this state, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master, and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master. If the
Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either CL series console will be followed by the other CL console.
Other functions
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the signal of an input channel will be sent.
The settings you make in the following procedure will be saved as part of the scene.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the center right of the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button to open the
BUS SETUP popup window.
In the BUS SETUP popup window you can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.
1 2 4 1 3 4
MIX 1–16 page MIX BUS 17–24/MATRIX BUS page
1 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons
Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO (stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2).
2
Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only)
For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send point.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button
VARI [PRE EQ]
VARI [PRE FADER]
FIXED
VARI
VARI
FIXED
Bus type Pre-fader send point
Immediately before the EQ
Immediately before the fader
---
202
Reference Manual
3 Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only)
Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
Pre-fader send point
Immediately before the EQ
Immediately before the fader
4 PAN LINK button
This button appears only if two adjacent buses are paired in stereo and the bus type is set to VARI.
If the button is on, the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting.
3.
Use the MIX1-16 tab and MIX17-24/MATRIX tab to access the buses whose settings you want to edit.
4.
Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify whether each bus will function as STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).
5.
Use the buttons of the PRE FADER SEND POINT/BUS TYPE field to select the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent.
In the case of a MIX bus, you can use this field to switch the type of bus (VARI or FIXED).
6.
As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off.
In the PAN LINK field, you can specify whether the panning of the signal routed from an input channel to the stereo bus will be linked with operation of the INPUT TO ST PAN knob (if the input channel’s SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and BUS TYPE is set to VARI).
• If the PAN LINK button is on:
If the send-destination bus is stereo, the PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND
LEVEL knob on the screens for input channels will be linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN knob.
• If the PAN LINK button is off:
The PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL knob of input channels in various screens is not linked with INPUT TO ST PAN; it can be operated independently.
off
1.
Other functions
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/
In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V MASTER field’s ON button or OFF button.
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on.
NOTE
This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs
(I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.
203
Reference Manual
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen,
LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps
Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the
BANK A or BANK B button.
You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired.
Other functions
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL console’s internal clock, and how to select the date and time display format.
The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the center of the SETUP screen, press the DATE/TIME button to access the DATE/
TIME popup window.
3.
Use the multifunction knobs to set the following parameters.
CONTRAST field
• NAME .........................Adjusts the contrast of the characters in the channel name displays on the top panel.
BRIGHTNESS field
• NAME .........................Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel.
This will also change the CH COLOR brightness. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR brightness after setting the name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob.
• CH COLOR................Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel. This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without changing the channel name display brightness.
• SCREEN......................Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. If the brightness is set to lower than level 2, the CL will start up next time with a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen.
• PANEL ........................Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the optional MBCL meter bridge is installed on the CL3/CL1, this knob setting will also affect the LEDs on the meter bridge.
NOTE
If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change.
• LAMP ..........................Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks.
4.
If desired, switch between banks A and B and make settings for the other bank in the same way.
Now you can switch between the BANK A and BANK B buttons to change the brightness of the touch screen, LCD, channel name displays, and lamps in a single operation. You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch between banks A and B.
204
This popup window includes the following items.
1) DATE
Specifies the date of the internal clock.
2) TIME
Specifies the time of the internal clock.
3) FORMAT
Specifies the format in which the time of the internal clock is displayed.
3.
In the FORMAT field, press the MODE buttons several times to select the desired format for date and time display.
You can select from the following display formats.
• Date
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)
DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)
YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
• Time
24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0–23)
12-Hour (hours shown from 0am–11am, and 0pm– 11pm)
4.
Use multifunction knobs 1–6 on the top panel to specify the current date and time.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
The date, time, and display format you specified will be finalized, and the popup window will close. If you press the CANCEL button or the “x” symbol instead of the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close.
Reference Manual
1
2
Setting the network address
This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the
NETWORK connector on the CL series console to connect it to a computer.
NOTE
Only the Administrator can change network settings.
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the center of the SETUP screen, press the NETWORK button to access the
NETWORK popup window.
3
4
Other functions
3.
Press the on-screen knob or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to specify the address.
If you plan to connect the CL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we recommend that you use the following default values. Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other device on the network.
IP address: 192.168.0.128 or similar
Gateway address: 192.168.0.1 or similar
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 or similar
For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide.
4.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
If you changed the setting, a confirmation dialog box will appear.
1 IP ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network.
2 GATEWAY ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between different media or protocols to allow communication within the network.
3 SUBNET MASK
Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the network address that distinguishes the network.
4 MAC ADDRESS
Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited.
NOTE
The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX
(transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps).
5.
To make the setting, press the OK button.
The changes will be finalized, and the popup screen will close. If you decide to cancel the change, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
In order for the change to take effect, you must power-off the CL series console and then turn it on again.
6.
Restart the CL series console.
205
Reference Manual
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
NOTICE
The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory!
Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory.
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
Other functions
3.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the initialization. Press the INITIALIZE button.
A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the operation.
4.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
The Initialization operation starts.
NOTE
Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete.
5.
A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
2.
Press one of the following buttons, depending on the type of initialization you want to perform.
• INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default settings.
• INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
The contents of memory — except for scene memories and libraries — will be returned to its factory default settings.
206
Reference Manual
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen
(Calibration function)
Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen.
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
Other functions
2.
Press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button.
The TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to calibrate the touch screen.
207
NOTE
If you are unable to access the calibration screen by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN
CALIBRATION button, you can use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC ] keys to select TOUCH
SCREEN CALIBRATION, and then press the [STORE] key to start.
3.
Press the START button.
A confirmation dialog box will appear.
4.
Press the OK button in the dialog box.
5.
A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen a total of three times. Press each location at which it appears.
NOTE
To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit.
6.
Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Reference Manual
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console, discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies.
NOTE
For information about adjusting the input gain or the detection point of the touch screen, refer to the appropriate sections in this chapter.
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
Other functions
2.
Press the FADER CALIBRATION button.
The FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, enabling you to adjust the faders.
The specified faders in the channel strip section, Centralogic section, and Master section will be semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the CL is starting up.
208
3.
Press a [SEL] key to specify the faders that you want to calibrate.
Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected.
4.
Press the START button.
A confirmation dialog box will appear.
5.
Press the OK button in the dialog box.
6.
Each of the specified faders will move to the target positions in the following sequence. Manually adjust the faders to the correct positions.
1 –∞ dB (all the way down)
2
–20 dB
3 0 dB
4
+10 dB (all the way up)
7.
After you adjust the fader position, press the [NEXT] button.
The process will proceed to the next fader position.
Reference Manual
8.
Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust the faders for positions 1 through 4 .
After the positions are corrected, automatic motorized calibration will start.
9.
When calibration is complete and if the RESTART button has not appeared, press the APPLY button.
The calibration settings will be saved in internal memory. If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again.
10.
Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Other functions
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain.
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
209
2.
In the MODE SELECT field, select the item you want to adjust, and then press the button.
The corresponding setting screen will appear.
You can make the following three gain adjustments for analog input and output.
Reference Manual
• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain)
Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps.
Other functions
• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain)
Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps.
• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain)
Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps.
3.
Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the corresponding multifunction knob to adjust the value.
If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB.
The factory settings are also 0 dB.
4.
Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
210
Reference Manual
Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can adjust the channel color.
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit.
After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
Other functions
2.
Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button.
The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the channel color.
211
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3.
Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust the color.
NOTE
Only one can be selected. Multiple selections are not possible.
4.
Press one of the color buttons on screen to select the desired color.
All channel color indicators turn the selected color. The currently-selected color button on screen will be surrounded by a white frame.
5.
While comparing the color of the selected channel’s indicator with the color of the other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), use the three right-most multifunction knobs to adjust the color.
The RGB values in the RGB ADJUSTMENT field change accordingly.
Reference Manual
6.
When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located on the right of the window to confirm the change.
NOTE
The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values.
7.
To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default setting, press the RESET
ALL button.
Other functions
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display
If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display.
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key of the panel, turn on the power.
After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2.
Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button.
The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the channel color.
3.
Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust.
Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will decrease the brightness.
4.
When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change.
8.
Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
5.
Press the EXIT button.
The CL will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
212
Reference Manual
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display
If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display.
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key of the panel, turn on the power.
After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2.
Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button.
The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the channel color.
3.
Hold down a [SEL] key on the panel, and turn multi-function knob 1 in the
Centralogic section.
Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward the right will darken the contrast of all channels.
4.
If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels, hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or [ON] key.
Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the contrast.
5.
When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change.
Other functions
Dante audio network settings
You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself and the
I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console. This section explains how to make Dante audio network settings.
Setting up a Dante audio network
1.
In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
NOTE
The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting.
6.
Press the EXIT button.
The CL will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
2.
In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window.
213
Reference Manual
3.
1
3
7
In the upper part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the SETUP tab to access the SETUP field.
2
4
5
6
This screen contains the following items.
1 CONSOLE ID select buttons
Set the IDs for the CL series consoles.
If five or more CL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to some of the units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID.
2 SECONDARY PORT select buttons
Specify how the Dante audio network is configured.
3 CANCEL button
When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button to cancel the changes you made.
4
APPLY button
After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to apply the changes you made.
Other functions
5 BIT select buttons
Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit.
NOTE
24bit: Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an Rio unit. When using a CL series system, you will normally use this setting.
32bit: This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data (when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data being transmitted will increase 20–30% compared to 24-bit.
6 LATENCY select buttons
Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, or 5.0 ms.
The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For details, refer to “
Setting the Dante audio network latency
” on
.
7 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons
Use these select buttons when using Dante Controller to make Dante patch settings.
If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT
PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console.
If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante patch settings.
You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons on other CL series consoles on the network.
NOTE
• Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1.
• If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not
Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen.
214
Reference Manual
Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT
1.
In the SETUP field, select the CONSOLE ID and the SECONDARY PORT.
The button you switched is shown in red.
2.
Press the APPLY button.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the change to the CONSOLE ID and
SECONDARY PORT.
3.
To execute the change, press the OK button.
The network audio module will be rebooted in order to change the settings.
When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return to its original appearance.
NOTE
• If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between the CL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you change the setting.
• The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the
CL series console.
215
Other functions
Setting the Dante audio network latency
An appropriate latency setting for signals sent and received via a Dante audio network varies depending on the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices that are connected to the CL series console.
■ Relationship between the switches and the number of hops
An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of hops in the network.
One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the number of hops starting from the master device to the most distant device (assuming that all devices are connected in series).
Switches mean network switches and routers, as well as the switches that are built into CL series consoles and I/O devices.
Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The following table shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops.
Number of hops
Up to 3
Up to 5
Up to 10
11 or more (or if a problem occurs)
Latency (ms)
0.25
0.5
1.0
5.0
NOTE
• Depending on network conditions, you may need to raise the latency value even if the number of hops is small.
• If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting is the cause of the problem.
■ Connection examples and latency settings
Daisy chain connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
3
2
2
3
1
3 hops = 0.25 ms
1
3 hops = 0.25 ms
Reference Manual
Daisy chain connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
4
3
2
3
2
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
Redundant connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
4
3
1
3 hops = 0.25 ms
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
2
Other functions
Redundant connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
3
4
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
2
216
Daisy chain connections
256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
9 hops = 1.0 ms
4
3
2
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
Reference Manual
Redundant connections
Two consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
5
4
3
1
5 hops = 0.5 ms
2
Other functions
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
Here’s how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
1.
In the lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the DEVICE MOUNT tab to access the DEVICE MOUNT field.
1 2
217
3
This screen contains the following items.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
3 I/O device select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT popup window.
The upper line of the button shows the device label.
The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs.
If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
Reference Manual
2.
Press an I/O device select button to access the DEVICE SELECT popup window.
1
Other functions
■ When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST
To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DEVICE
LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
3
1
1 Setup method selection buttons
Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device.
• NO ASSIGN............................... Not mounted
• DEVICE LIST............................ Select and mount from the device list
• SUPPORTED DEVICE............ Select and mount a supported device
• DVS ............................................. Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS)
• MANUAL ................................... Enter a device label and mount
2
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the multi-function knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount.
3 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the multi-function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network. If the selected I/O device is supported by the CL series, the number of inputs and outputs will be entered automatically.
218
Reference Manual
■ When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE
If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the CL series, press the SUPPORTED
DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be made even when not connected to a Dante audio network.
1
2
3
4
This screen contains the following items.
1
DEVICE TYPE
This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the CL series.
From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE TYPE select knob
Use the multi-function knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
3 I/O device indication
This area shows the selected I/O device.
The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device.
The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs.
4 UNIT ID knob
Use the multifunction knobs to specify the UNIT ID.
The indicator shows the UNIT ID.
Other functions
NOTE
• If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device’s UNIT ID to “1”.
• If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between devices.
• For devices other than the Rio series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned to the same ID as an Rio series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However since the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers to overlap.
• If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or DANTE-ACCEL), and you want to use that device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller.
• The Dante-MY16-AUD and DANTE-ACCEL will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as follows.
Dante-MY16-AUD: Y###-Audinate-DANTE-MY16******
DANTE-ACCEL: Y###-Yamaha-DANTE-ACCEL*******
# is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0–9 and uppercase A–F (000–
FFF)
* indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or -
(hyphen) may be used)
• If you are controlling the CL console from an Rio series unit, we recommend that you set the Rio unit’s START UP MODE to “REFRESH.”
Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting, since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system setting for REMOTE HA
ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.”
With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings that were backed up by the Rio series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output.
• A single CL console can control the HA of up to eight Rio series units.
If nine or more Rio series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between multiple CL consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the Rio series units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to
“RESUME.”
219
Reference Manual
■ When setup method selection button = DVS
■ When setup method selection button = MANUAL
If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL button to access the DVS/MANUAL field.
Other functions
REMOTE HA settings
Here’s how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
1.
In the lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the REMOTE HA tab to access the REMOTE HA field.
3 1 2
1 2
3
This screen contains the following items.
1
DEVICE LABEL
Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard.
2
INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the multi-function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network.
3 Device label entry keyboard
Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device.
NOTE
• If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button.
• If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified.
3.
After you’ve selected the I/O device to mount, press the OK button to close the
DEVICE SELECT popup window.
This screen contains the following items.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network.
3 HA device select buttons
Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window.
The upper line of the button shows the device label.
The lower line of the button shows the product name and the number of inputs and outputs.
If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
220
Reference Manual
2.
Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window.
1
3
2
Other functions
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output connector.
This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the CL series console or to switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the CL series console can send control signals to an external device.
For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer to
.
Using GPI IN
You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series console from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the CL series console’s
Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes.
1.
Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.
2.
In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network.
2 with RECALL button
If this button is on, the settings saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA device when the CL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled.
3 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the multi-function knob to select the HA device that you want to mount.
NOTE
• Do not specify “with RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and settings have already been made on a different CL series console.
• The HA device can also be operated from a CL series console that is not set to “with RECALL.”
3.
After you’ve selected the HA device to mount, press the OK button to close the
REMOTE HA SELECT popup window.
If you’ve changed the setting by pressing the “with RECALL” button, a confirmation dialog box will appear.
To make the setting, press the OK button.
221
Reference Manual
3.
Press the MIDI/GPI button.
The MIDI SETUP screen will appear.
Other functions
4.
Press the GPI tab.
The GPI page will appear.
3
1
2
222
1 GPI IN status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port.
2 POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port.
............ (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is grounded.
............ (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level voltage is input.
3 GPI IN SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the GPI IN SETUP popup window.
The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter.
5.
Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port.
For each port, select either low-active or high-active as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using.
Reference Manual
6.
To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN
SETUP popup button.
The GPI IN SETUP popup window will appear.
Other functions
Using GPI OUT
The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by performing operations on the CL series console.
1.
Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.
2.
In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the MIDI/GPI button.
The MIDI/GPI screen will appear.
4.
Press the GPI tab.
The GPI page will appear.
3 4
1
2
NOTE
The items that can be selected are the same as for the USER DEFINED keys.
7.
In each field, select the desired function or parameter.
NOTE
• With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of external switch.
• With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type of external switch as appropriate for your needs.
8.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
You will return to the GPI screen.
9.
Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports.
NOTE
Settings in the GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved as SETUP data.
223
1
GPI OUT status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port.
2
POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port.
............ (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.
............ (Low active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active.
Reference Manual
3 GPI OUT SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the GPI OUT SETUP popup window.
The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter.
4 TEST button
While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control signal.
5.
Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port.
For each port, select either low-active or high-active as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using.
6.
To assign a function or parameter, press the GPI OUT SETUP popup button.
7.
In each field, select the desired function or parameter.
8.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
9.
Other functions
Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports.
Using FADER START
Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem with fader operations.
1.
Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.
2.
In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the MIDI/GPI button.
The MIDI/GPI screen will appear.
You can assign the following functions.
Function
NO ASSIGN
CUE ACTIVE
---
Parameter
CUE ON
DCA ONLY
INPUT ONLY
OUTPUT ONLY
GPI IN ACTIVE IND. PORT 1–PORT 5
POWER ON
USER DEF.
KEY ACTIVE IND.
---
USER DEFINED KEY 1–
USER DEFINED KEY 16
CL console operation
No assignment
Turn on the [CUE] key of the selected channel
Turn on the DCA [CUE] key
Turn on the [CUE] key of an input channel
Turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel
The function assigned to GPI IN port 1–5 becomes active
The power of the CL series console is turned on
The function assigned to the USER DEFINED key becomes active
224
Reference Manual
4.
Press the FADER START tab to access the FADER START page.
The following items are displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
1
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
2
OUTPUT DESTINATION field
• GPI OUT1–GPI OUT5 buttons
Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings.
3 Fader indicator
This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys of the console panel to select a fader.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
Other functions
4 THRESHOLD field
• UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs
These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls below the
DOWNSTROKE level. If FADER TALLY is selected as the fader mode, UPSTROKE and
DOWNSTROKE specify the level range for which a trigger signal will be output. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate these parameters.
NOTE
• The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader) for each GPI OUT port.
• Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the
DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER
TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid.
5 MODE field
Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from the
GPI OUT port.
You can choose from the following fader modes.
• NO ASSIGN
Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output.
• FADER START
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it.
• FADER STOP
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB).
• FADER TALLY
A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB) or until that GPI
OUT port receives a different trigger.
225
Reference Manual
Other functions
The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI OUT port will change in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the THRESHOLD field is set to –60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to –∞. (This illustration shows the case in which is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is will be reversed.)
, the polarity of the output signal
FADER
START
FADER
STOP
250 msec
250 msec
FADER
TALLY
NOTE
At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited; for details, refer to the “Input/output characteristics” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
5.
For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to operate, and the type of operation.
6.
When you have finished making settings, click the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the FADER MODE screen.
226
Reference Manual
Appendices
EQ Library List
# Title
01 Bass Drum 1
02 Bass Drum 2
03 Snare Drum 1
04 Snare Drum 2
05 Tom-tom 1
06 Cymbal
07 High Hat
08 Percussion
09 E. Bass 1
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
100 Hz
1.25
Parameter
265 Hz
10.0
1.06 kHz
0.90
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
5.30 kHz
—
LPF
G +8.0 dB
F 80.0 Hz
Q 1.4
–7.0 dB
400 Hz
4.5
+6.0 dB ON
2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz
2.2
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB
F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz
Q 1.25
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
180 Hz
—
335 Hz
10.0
2.36 kHz
0.70
4.00 kHz
0.10
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +2.0 dB
F 212 Hz
–7.5 dB
670 Hz
+2.0 dB +1.0 dB
4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz
Q 1.4
10.0
1.25
0.28
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB
F
Q
106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz
— 8.0
0.90
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz
Q —
–2.5 dB
425 Hz
0.50
+1.0 dB +0.5 dB
2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz
1.0
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.5 dB
F 100 Hz
0.0 dB
400 Hz
+2.0 dB
2.80 kHz
0.0 dB
17.0 kHz
F
Q
Q — 4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
35.5 Hz
—
112 Hz
5.0
2.00 kHz
4.5
4.00 kHz
—
# Title
10 E. Bass 2
11 Syn. Bass 1
12 Syn. Bass 2
13 Piano 1
14 Piano 2
15 E. G. Clean
16 E. G. Crunch 1
17 E. G. Crunch 2
18 E. G. Dist. 1
19 E. G. Dist. 2
20 A. G. Stroke 1
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.0 dB
F 112 Hz
Q 0.10
0.0 dB
112 Hz
5.0
+2.5 dB
2.24 kHz
6.3
+0.5 dB
4.00 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 0.10
8.0
4.5
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
125 Hz
1.6
180 Hz
8.0
1.12 kHz
2.2
12.5 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –6.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz
Q —
0.0 dB
950 Hz
8.0
+2.0 dB
3.15 kHz
0.90
+4.0 dB
7.50 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 5.6
10.0
0.70
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB
F
Q
265 Hz
0.18
400 Hz
10.0
1.32 kHz
6.3
4.50 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +4.5 dB
F
Q
140 Hz
8.0
0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB
1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz
4.5
0.63
9.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
125 Hz
8.0
450 Hz
0.40
3.35 kHz
0.16
19.0 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +5.0 dB
F
Q
355 Hz
—
0.0 dB
950 Hz
9.0
+3.5 dB 0.0 dB
3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz
10.0
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
315 Hz
—
1.06 kHz
10.0
4.25 kHz
4.0
12.5 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
106 Hz
0.90
1.00 kHz
4.5
1.90 kHz
3.5
5.30 kHz
—
227
Appendices
# Title
21 A. G. Stroke 2
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
24 Brass Sec.
25 Male Vocal 1
26 Male Vocal 2
27 Female Vo. 1
28 Female Vo. 2
29 Chorus & Harmo
30 Total EQ 1
31 Total EQ 2
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –3.5 dB
F 300 Hz
Q —
–2.0 dB
750 Hz
9.0
0.0 dB
2.00 kHz
4.5
+2.0 dB
3.55 kHz
—
G
F
Q
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q — 4.5
4.5
0.125
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
180 Hz
—
355 Hz
7.0
4.00 kHz
4.5
4.25 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –2.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz
Q 2.8
–1.0 dB
850 Hz
2.0
+1.5 dB
2.12 kHz
0.70
+3.0 dB
4.50 kHz
7.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB
F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
170 Hz
0.11
236 Hz
10.0
2.65 kHz
5.6
6.70 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –1.0 dB
F
Q
118 Hz
0.18
+1.0 dB
400 Hz
0.45
+1.5 dB +2.0 dB
2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz
0.56
0.14
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB
F
Q
112 Hz
—
335 Hz
0.16
2.00 kHz
0.20
6.70 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –2.0 dB
F
Q
90.0 Hz
2.8
–1.0 dB
850 Hz
2.0
+1.5 dB +3.0 dB
2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
0.70
7.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB
F
Q
95.0 Hz
7.0
950 Hz
2.2
2.12 kHz
5.6
16.0 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB
F
Q
95.0 Hz
7.0
750 Hz
2.8
1.80 kHz
5.6
18.0 kHz
—
Reference Manual
# Title
32 Total EQ 3
33 Bass Drum 3
34 Snare Drum 3
35 Tom-tom 2
36 Piano 3
37 Piano Low
38 Piano High
39 Fine-EQ Cass
40 Narrator
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +1.5 dB
F 67.0 Hz
Q —
+0.5 dB
850 Hz
0.28
+2.0 dB
1.90 kHz
0.70
+4.0 dB
15.0 kHz
—
G
F
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz
Q 2.0
10.0
0.40
0.40
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
224 Hz
—
560 Hz
4.5
4.25 kHz
2.8
4.00 kHz
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –9.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz
Q —
+1.5 dB
212 Hz
4.5
+2.0 dB
5.30 kHz
1.25
0.0 dB
17.0 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 8.0
10.0
9.0
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
190 Hz
10.0
400 Hz
6.3
6.70 kHz
2.2
12.5 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –5.5 dB
F
Q
190 Hz
10.0
+1.5 dB
400 Hz
6.3
+5.0 dB +3.0 dB
6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz
2.2
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB
F
Q
75.0 Hz
—
1.00 kHz
4.5
4.00 kHz
1.8
12.5 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB
F
Q
106 Hz
4.0
–1.0 dB
710 Hz
7.0
+2.0 dB 0.0 dB
2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz
0.63
—
DYNAMICS Library List
# Title Type
1 Gate
2 Ducking
3 A. Dr. BD
4 A. Dr. SN
5 De-Esser
6 Comp
7 Expand
GATE
DUCKING
GATE
GATE
DE-ESSER
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
8 Compander (H) COMPANDER-H
9 Compander (S) COMPANDER-S
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Frequency (kHz)
Type
Q
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
228
0.0
2
250
–23
1.6
–8
2.5
30
–8
–23
1
0.63
238
–8
2.00
HPF
93
1.20 S
6.32 S
–11
–53
0
1.93
400
Value
–26
–56
0
2.56
331
–19
–22
0.0
6
250
–8
4
25
0.0
24
180
70
–10
3.5
1
1.7
1
3.5
2
#
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Title
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. Tom
A. Dr. OverTop
E. B. Finger
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-S
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Appendices
2
151
–8
1.7
11
0.0
10
128
–23
2
0
0.5
8
3.5
2
12
–11
3.5
1
–1.5
7
192
–17
2.5
Value
–24
3
9
5.5
2
58
38
–3.5
54
842
–12
2
15
4.5
2
470
–20
2
2
5.0
2
749
–24
2
Reference Manual
#
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Title
E. B. Slap
Syn. Bass
Piano1
Piano2
E. Guitar
A. Guitar
Strings1
Strings2
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
2
174
–8
3.5
7
2.5
4
261
17
1.0
hard
238
–18
3.5
7
6.0
–10
3.5
9
3.0
hard
250
–9
2.5
Value
–12
1.7
6
4.0
hard
133
33
1.5
2
749
–12
1.5
93
1.5
4
1.35 S
–10
2.5
5
1.5
2
238
–11
2
#
26
27
28
Title
Strings3
BrassSection
Syn. Pad
29 SamplingPerc
30
31
32
33
Sampling BD
Sampling SN
Hip Comp
Solo Vocal1
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
18
238
–14
2
2
3.5
4
35
58
2.0
1
238
–18
1.7
8
–2.5
–18
1.7
18
4.0
1
226
–13
2
Value
–17
1.5
76
2.5
2
186
15
0.0
15
163
–20
2.5
31
2.0
1
342
–18
4
8
8.0
hard
354
–23
20
229
#
34
35
36
37
38
39
Title
Solo Vocal2
Chorus
Click Erase
Announcer
Limiter1
Limiter2
40 Total Comp1
41 Total Comp2
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
* At fs=44.1 kHz
Reference Manual
Appendices
18
180
–9
3
20
–3.0
90
3.90 s
1
2.0
2
284
–14
2.5
1
–2.5
2
226
–33
2
–9
1.7
39
2.5
Value
–8
2.5
26
1.5
3
331
94
2.5
hard
447
–16
6
11
6.0
1
180
0
∞
0
0.0
hard
319
–18
3.5
Dynamics Parameters
Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2. Output channels provide
DYNAMICS section 1.
An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types:
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, and EXPANDER.
An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the following four types:
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft), and DE-ESSER.
An output channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types:
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), and COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft).
■ GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
–72 to 0 (73 points)
–∞, –69 to 0 (71 points)
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
Description
This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.
This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.
This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level.
This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Level Time Time
Appendices
■ DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified
THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
–54 to 0 (55 points)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
Description
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.
This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.
This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the
THRESHOLD level.
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Level Time Time
230
Reference Manual
■ COMPRESSOR
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The
COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
KNEE
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
Description
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.
This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level.
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard, OUT
GAIN=0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
RATIO
THRESHOLD
Appendices
■ EXPANDER
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RATIO
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
KNEE
Range
–54 to 0 (55 points)
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
Description
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold.
This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the expander’s output signal level.
This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
THRESHOLD
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
THRESHOLD
RATIO
Input Level Time Time
Input Level Time Time
231
Reference Manual
■ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
Input Level
0dB
WIDTH
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1
0 dB and higher ................................ Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold ................. Functions as a compressor.
3
Below the threshold and width ..... Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of
1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes.
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RATIO
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
WIDTH (dB)
Range
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Description
This determines the level at which compression is applied.
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
–18.0 to 0.0 (181 points)
1–90 (90 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the compander’s output signal level.
This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.
■ DE-ESSER
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal.
Parameter
THRESHOLD
FREQUENCY
TYPE
Q
Range Description
–54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect applies.
1kHz–12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies.
HPF, BPF
10.0–0.10 (41 points)
Type of filter used to detect the frequency band.
Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF.
232
Appendices
Effect Type List
Title
REV-X Hall
REV-X Room
REV-X Plate
Type
REV-X HALL
REV-X ROOM
REV-X PLATE
Description
New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound.
Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL,
REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE
Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE
Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
Plate reverb simulation with gate
Stereo Reverb ST REVERB
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Gate Reverb GATE REVERB
Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE
Mono Delay
Stereo Delay
Mod.Delay
Delay LCR
MONO DELAY
STEREO DELAY
MOD.DELAY
DELAY LCR
Stereo reverb
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Gated early reflections
Gated reverse early reflections
Simple mono delay
Simple stereo delay
Simple repeat delay with modulation
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Echo
Chorus
Flange
Symphonic
ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
CHORUS Chorus
FLANGE Flanger
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus
Phaser
Dyna.Flange
Dyna.Phaser
HQ. Pitch
Dual Pitch
Tremolo
Auto Pan
Rotary
PHASER
DYNA.PHASER
HQ.PITCH
16-stage stereo phase shifter
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger
Dynamically controlled phase shifter
Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results
DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter
TREMOLO Tremolo
AUTO PAN Auto-panner
Ring Mod.
Mod.Filter
RING MOD.
MOD.FILTER
Ring modulator
Modulated filter
Dyna.Filter
Rev+Chorus
RevChorus
Rev+Flange
RevFlange
REV+CHORUS
REVCHORUS
REV+FLANGE
REVFLANGE
Reverb and chorus in parallel
Reverb and chorus in series
Reverb and flanger in parallel
Reverb and flanger in series
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
RevSympho. REVSYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in series
RevPan REVPAN Reverb and auto-pan in series
Delay+Er.
DelayEr.
DELAY+ER.
DELAYER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
Delay and early reflections in series
Reference Manual
Title
Delay+Rev
DelayRev
DistDelay
Multi Filter
Type
DELAY+REV
DELAYREV
DISTDELAY
MULTI FILTER
Delay and reverb in parallel
Delay and reverb in series
Distortion and delay in series
Description
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
Freeze
Distortion DISTORTION Distortion
Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation
Comp276
Comp276S
Comp260
Comp260S
COMP276
COMP276S
COMP260
COMP260S
This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a sought-after classic in recording studios.
This is a stereo model of COMP276.
This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter
1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR.
This is a stereo model of the COMP260.
Equalizer601
OpenDeck
EQUALIZER601
OPENDECK
This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It can be used to obtain a sense of drive.
This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
M.Band Dyna.
M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
Appendices
Effects Parameters
■ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE
Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Parameter
REV TIME
INI. DLY
0.28–27.94 s
*1
0.0–120.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1–1.4
Range
Reverb time
Description
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
LO.FREQ
DIFF.
ROOM SIZE 0–28
DECAY 0–53
HPF
22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz
0–10
LPF
Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
Size of room
Gate closing speed
THRU, 22.0 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
1.00 kHz–18.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting.
■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
DIFF.
DENSITY
E/R DLY
E/R BAL.
0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4
0–10
0–100%
Range
0.0–100.0 ms
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
Reverb density
Delay between early reflections and reverb
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
LPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB
ATTACK 0–120 ms
HOLD *1
Level at which gate kicks in
Gate opening speed
Gate open time
DECAY *2 Gate closing speed
*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
233
Reference Manual
■ STEREO REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
Description
REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type
INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4
DIFF.
0–10
DENSITY 0–100%
E/R BAL.
HPF
LPF
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
Reverb density
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
■ EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter Range
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
LIVENESS 0–10
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
INI. DLY
DIFF.
DENSITY
ER NUM.
FB GAIN
1–19
–99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
0–100%
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
Feedback gain
High-frequency feedback ratio
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
234
Appendices
■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
Type-A, Type-B
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
LIVENESS 0–10
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
DENSITY
0–10
0–100%
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
ER NUM.
FB GAIN
HPF
LPF
1–19
–99 to +99%
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
Reflection density
High-frequency feedback ratio
Number of early reflections
Feedback gain
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
■ MONO DELAY
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
SYNC
NOTE
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
OFF/ON
*1
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*1.
(Max. value depends on tempo setting)
■ STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. G L
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R –99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
NOTE L
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
*1
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Reference Manual
■ MOD.DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
HPF
LPF
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
MOD.NOTE
Range
0.0–2725.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation waveform
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio 0.1–1.0
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Sine/Tri
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
*2.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY C
DELAY R
FB. DLY
LEVEL L
LEVEL C
LEVEL R
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
–100 to +100%
–100 to +100%
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay time
Center channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Left channel delay level
Center channel delay level
Right channel delay level
Description
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
*1
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
*1
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
NOTE C
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Appendices
■ ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB.DLY L
FB.DLY R
FB. G L
FB. G R
LR FBG
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback delay time
Right channel feedback delay time
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
RL FBG –99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
NOTE R *1
NOTE FBL *1
NOTE FBR *1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
PM DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1.
Description
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
235
Reference Manual
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
■ FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1.
■ SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1.
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
Appendices
OFFSET
PHASE
STAGE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
■ PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
FB. GAIN
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
–99 to +99%
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
0–100
0.00–354.38 degrees
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Left and right modulation phase balance
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
OFF/ON
*1
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1.
■ DYNA.FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
0–100
Range
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
–99 to +99%
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
Delay time offset
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
236
Reference Manual
■ DYNA.PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
STAGE
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
Range
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
0–100
–99 to +99%
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
PITCH
FINE
DELAY
Range
–12 to +12 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
0.0–1000.0 ms
FB. GAIN
MODE
SYNC
NOTE
–99 to +99%
1–10
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Pitch shift
Pitch shift fine
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Appendices
■ DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
PITCH 1
FINE 1
Range
–24 to +24 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
LEVEL 1
PAN 1
DELAY 1
FB. G 1
MODE
PITCH 2
FINE 2
LEVEL 2
PAN 2
DELAY 2
FB. G 2
SYNC
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
–100 to +100%
L63 to R63
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
1–10
–24 to +24 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
–100 to +100%
L63 to R63
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
OFF/ON
*1
*1
Description
Channel #1 pitch shift
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #1 pan
Channel #1 delay time
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Channel #2 pitch shift
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #2 pan
Channel #2 delay time
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
*1.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
237
Reference Manual
■ AUTOPAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
*1
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*2
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1. L
R, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
■ ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
ROTATE
SPEED
SLOW
FAST
DRIVE
ACCEL
LOW
HIGH
Range
STOP, START
SLOW, FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
0.05–10.00 Hz
0–100
0–10
0–100
0–100
Description
Rotation stop, start
Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW rotation speed
FAST rotation speed
Overdrive level
Acceleration at speed changes
Low-frequency filter
High-frequency filter
238
Appendices
■ RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
SOURCE
Range
OSC, SELF
OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
FM DEPTH 0–100%
SYNC
FM NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Oscillator frequency
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
*1.
■ MOD.FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
PHASE
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
SYNC
NOTE
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
0.00–354.38 degrees
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
0–20
0–100
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output level
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
■ DYNA.FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
Range
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
0–20
0–100
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Filter frequency change decay speed
Filter type
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output Level
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Reference Manual
■ REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb time
Description
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
DENSITY 0–100%
REV/CHO 0–100%
HPF
Reverb density
Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
*1.
■ REVCHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter
DENSITY
REV.BAL
Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
0–100%
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Reverb and chorused reverb balance
(0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF
LPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE
SYNC
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
NOTE *1
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
*1.
239
Appendices
■ REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter
REV TIME
INI. DLY
DIFF.
DENSITY
REV/FLG
HPF
0.3–99.0 s
0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
0–10
Range Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
0–100%
0–100%
Reverb density
Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
*1.
■ REVFLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter
DENSITY
REV.BAL
Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
0–100%
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Reverb and flanged reverb balance
(0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
*1.
Reference Manual
■ REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
DENSITY
REV/SYM
HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
0–100%
0–100%
Reverb time
Description
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
0–100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE
SYNC
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
NOTE *1
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
*1.
■ REVSYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
0–10
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance
(0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
*1.
240
Appendices
■ REVPAN
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect.
Parameter
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
DENSITY
REV.BAL
HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
0–100%
0–100%
Range Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Reverb and panned reverb balance
(0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
*1
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*2
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
*1. L
R, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
■ DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DLY/ER 0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance
(0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
TYPE
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
LIVENESS 0–10
INI. DLY
DIFF.
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
DENSITY
ER NUM.
SYNC
NOTE L
0–100%
1–19
OFF/ON
*1
Reverb density
Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Reference Manual
■ DELAYER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Left channel delay time
Description
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DLY.BAL
HPF
LPF
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay balance
(0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Type of early reflection simulation
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
0–10
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
DENSITY
ER NUM.
SYNC
NOTE L
0–100%
1–19
OFF/ON
*1
Reverb density
Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
241
Appendices
■ DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
DELAY HI
DLY/REV
HPF
LPF
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0–100%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
REV HI 0.1–1.0
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
DENSITY
SYNC
NOTE L
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0–10
0–100%
OFF/ON
*1
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Spread
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Description
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ DELAYREV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
DELAY HI
DLY.BAL
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0–100%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
HPF
LPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
DIFF.
DENSITY
SYNC
0.1–1.0
0–10
0–100%
OFF/ON
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1 NOTE L
NOTE R *1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Reference Manual
■ DISTDELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
DST TYPE
0–100
–10 to +10
0–20
OFF/ON
*1
Range
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0–100 DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
MOD.NOTE
DELAY
*2
0.0–2725.0 ms
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
DLY.BAL
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
0–100%
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone control
Noise reduction
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Distortion and delay balance
(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
*1.
*2.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
TYPE 1
FREQ. 1
LEVEL 1
RESO. 1
TYPE 2
FREQ. 2
LEVEL 2
RESO. 2
TYPE 3
FREQ. 3
LEVEL 3
RESO. 3
Range
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
0–100
0–20
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
0–100
0–20
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
0–100
0–20
Description
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 1 frequency
Filter 1 level
Filter 1 resonance
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 2 frequency
Filter 2 level
Filter 2 resonance
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 3 frequency
Filter 3 level
Filter 3 resonance
Appendices
■ FREEZE
One input, two output basic sampler.
Parameter Range
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
REC DLY
PLY MODE
TRG LVL
–1000 to +1000 ms
MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
–60 to 0 dB
TRG MASK 0–1000 ms
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the
REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal.
Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received.
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP
NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback)
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time.
Playback start point in milliseconds
Playback end point in milliseconds
Loop start point in milliseconds
START *1
END
LOOP
*1
*1
LOOP
NUM
PITCH
0–100
–12 to +12 semitones
FINE –50 to +50 cents
MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL
START
[SAMPLE]
END
[SAMPLE]
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
0–131000
0–131000
Number of times the sample plays
Playback pitch shift
Playback pitch shift fine
PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.
Playback start point in samples
Playback end point in samples
Loop start point in samples
*1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
■ DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
Range
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0–100
0–100
–10 to +10
0–20
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone
Noise reduction
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
242
Reference Manual
■ AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter
AMP TYPE *1
Range
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
BASS
MIDDLE
TREBLE
N. GATE
CAB DEP
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–20
0–100%
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Bass tone control
Middle tone control
High tone control
Noise reduction
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
■ COMP276
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios.
It will produce a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can control two monaural channels independently.
Parameter
INPUT 1
Range
–180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 input level
OUTPUT 1 –180 to 0 dB
RATIO 1 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
Ratio for CH1 compressor
ATTACK 1 0.022–50.4 ms
RELEASE1 10.88–544.22 ms
MAKE UP1
SIDEHPF1
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Description
Attack time for CH1 compressor
Release time for CH1 compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is applied
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
INPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB
OUTPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB
RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor
ATTACK 2 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor
RELEASE2 10.88–544.22 ms
Adjusts the CH2 input level
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
MAKE UP2 OFF, ON
Release time of CH2 compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is applied
SIDEHPF2 OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
243
Appendices
■ COMP276S
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios.
It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can link and control the L and
R channel parameters.
Parameter
INPUT
OUTPUT
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
MAKE UP
SIDE HPF
Range
–180 to 0 dB
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the input level
Adjusts the output gain
1:2, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of the compressor
0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of the compressor
10.88–544.22 ms Release time of the compressor
Description
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is applied
When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
■ COMP260
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live
SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several parameters via stereo links.
Parameter
THRE.1
KNEE1
ATTACK1
Range
–60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
0.01–80.0 ms
RELEASE1 6.2–999 ms
RATIO1 1.0–500, ∞
OUTPUT1 –20 to 40 dB
THRE.2
KNEE2
ATTACK2
–60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
0.01–80.0 ms
RELEASE2 6.2–999 ms
RATIO2 1.0–500, ∞
OUTPUT2 –20 to 40 dB
ST LINK OFF, ON
Threshold of CH compressor
Knee of CH1 compressor
Attack time of CH1 compressor
Description
Release time of CH1 compressor
Ratio of CH1 compressor
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
Threshold of CH2 compressor
Knee of CH2 compressor
Attack time of CH2 compressor
Release time of CH2 compressor
Ratio of CH2 compressor
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and
RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked
■ COMP260S
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live
SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter
THRE.
KNEE
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
OUTPUT
Range
–60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
0.01–80.0 ms
6.2–999 ms
1.0–500, ∞
–20 to 40 dB
Threshold of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Adjusts the output gain
Description
Reference Manual
■ EQUALIZER601
This effect emulates the characteristics of 70’s analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound.
INPUT
OUTPUT
MID3 Q
MID3 F
MID3 G
MID4 Q
MID4 F
MID4 G
HI TYPE
Parameter
LO TYPE
LO F
LO G
MID1 Q
MID1 F
MID1 G
MID2 Q
MID2 F
MID2 G
HI F
HI G
LO SW
MID1 SW
MID2 SW
MID3 SW
MID4 SW
HI SW
Range
HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
*1
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
TYPE CLEAN, DRIVE
Description
Type of EQ1
Cut-off frequency of EQ1
Gain of EQ1
Q of EQ2
Center frequency of EQ2
Gain of EQ2
Q of EQ3
Center frequency of EQ3
Gain of EQ3
Input gain
Output gain
Q of EQ4
Center frequency of EQ4
Gain of EQ4
Q of EQ5
Center frequency of EQ5
Gain of EQ5
Type of EQ6
Cut-off frequency of EQ6
Gain of EQ6
Switches EQ1 on/off
Switches EQ2 on/off
Switches EQ3 on/off
Switches EQ4 on/off
Switches EQ5 on/off
Switches EQ6 on/off
Selects the equalizer type. The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound, emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits.
*1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2)
244
Appendices
■ OPENDECK
It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a playback deck.) You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc.
Parameter
REC DEC
Range
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
Selects the recording deck type
Description
REC LVL
REC HI
REC BIAS
REPR DEC
REPR LVL
REPR HI
REPR LO
MAKE UP
TP SPEED
TP KIND
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
–1.00 to +1.00
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
Off, On
15ips, 30ips
Old, New
Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts the sound
Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck
Adjusts the bias of the recording deck
Selects the playback deck type
Adjusts the output level of the playback deck
Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck
Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck
When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change, maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of distortion without changing the output level.
Selects the tape speed
Selects the tape type
■ M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter Range
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB
LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
HI. GAIN
TOTAL
CEILING
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
–72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
CMP.THRE
–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
CMP.RAT
1:1 to 20:1
CMP.ATK
CMP.REL
0–120 ms
*1
CMP.KNEE
0–5
CMP.BYP
EXP.THRE
OFF/ON
–54.0 dB to –24.0 dB
EXP.RAT
EXP.REL
EXP.BYP
LIM.THRE
LIM.ATK
1:1 to 5:1
*1
OFF/ON
–12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
0–120 ms
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
Filter slope
Low band gain
Mid band gain
High band gain
Overall gain
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
Threshold of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Bypasses the compressor
Threshold of the expander
Ratio of the expander
Release time of the expander
Bypasses the expander
Threshold of the limiter
Attack time of the limiter
Reference Manual
Parameter
LIM.REL
LIM.KNEE
LIM.BYP
PRESENCE
*1
0–5
OFF/ON
Range
–10 to +10
LOOKUP
MAKE UP
0.0–100.0 ms
OFF/ON
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Description
Release time of the limiter
Knee of the limiter
Bypasses the limiter
Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the threshold of the low band. Negative (–) values do the opposite. If this is set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way.
Lookup delay
Automatically adjusts the output level
■ M.BAND COMP
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter Range
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB
LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
HI. GAIN
TOTAL
CEILING
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
–72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
–6.0 dB to 0.0dB, OFF
LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
LOW RAT
LOW ATK
1:1 to 20:1
0–120 ms
LOW REL *1
LOW KNEE 0–5
LOW BYP OFF/ON
MID THRE
MID RAT
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
1:1 to 20:1
MID ATK
MID REL
0–120 ms
*1
MID KNEE 0–5
MID BYP OFF/ON
HI. THRE
HI. RAT
HI. ATK
HI. RAT
HI. KNEE
HI. BYP
LOOKUP
MAKE UP
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
1:1 to 20:1
0–120 ms
*1
0–5
OFF/ON
0.0–100.0 ms
OFF/ON
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
Filter slope
Low band gain
Mid band gain
High band gain
Overall gain
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
Threshold of the low band compressor
Ratio of the low band compressor
Attack time of the low band compressor
Release time of the low band compressor
Knee of the low band compressor
Bypasses the low band compressor
Threshold of the mid band compressor
Ratio of the mid band compressor
Attack time of the mid band compressor
Release time of the mid band compressor
Knee of the mid band compressor
Bypasses the mid band compressor
Threshold of the high band compressor
Ratio of the high band compressor
Attack time of the high band compressor
Release time of the high band compressor
Knee of the high band compressor
Bypasses the high band compressor
Lookup delay
Automatically adjusts the output level
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
245
Appendices
Premium Rack Processor Parameters
■ Portico5033
This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company.
Parameter Range
ALL BYPASS OFF, ON
TRIM
LF FREQ
LF GAIN
LMF IN
LMF Q
LMF FREQ
LMF GAIN
MF IN
MF Q
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
30.00 to 300.0 Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
OFF, ON
0.70 to 5.00
50.00 to 400.0 Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
OFF, ON
0.70 to 5.00
MF FREQ
MF GAIN
HMF IN
330.0 to 2500 Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
OFF, ON
HMF Q 0.70 to 5.00
HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz
HMF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB
LF/HF IN
HF FREQ
HF GAIN
OFF, ON
2.50k to 25.0k Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Description
Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Input gain
Center frequency of the LF band
Gain of the LF band
Switches the LMF band on/off
Q of the LMF band
Center frequency of the LMF band
Gain of the LMF band
Switches the MF band on/off
Q of the MF band
Center frequency of the MF band
Gain of the MF band
Switches the HMF band on/off
Q of the HMF band
Center frequency of the HMF band
Gain of the HMF band
Switches the LF/HF bands on/off
Center frequency of the HF band
Gain of the HF band
■ Portico5043
This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company.
Parameter
IN OFF, ON
Range Description
Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type.
FB OFF, ON
THRESHOLD –50.0 to 0.0 dB
RATIO
Threshold level
1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
20 to 75 ms
100 ms to 2.50 sec
–6.0 to 20.0 dB
Attack time
Release time
Output level
Reference Manual
■ U76
This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations.
Parameter
INPUT
OUTPUT
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
METER
Range
–96.0 to 0.0 dB
–96.0 to 0.0 dB
5.50 to 0.10 ms
1100.0 to 56.4 ms
ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20
OFF, +4, +8, GR
Description
Input level
Output level
Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest attack.
Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest release.
Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect.
Switches the meter display
■ Opt-2A
This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor.
Parameter
GAIN
Range
–56.0 dB to 40.0 dB
PEAK REDUCTION –48.0 dB to 48.0 dB
RATIO 2.00 to 10.00
METER SELECT
OUTPUT+10, GAIN REDUCTION,
OUTPUT+4
Description
Output level
Amount of gain reduction
Compression ratio
Switches the meter display
■ EQ-1A
This processor emulates a vintage EQ that’s considered a classic example of a passive EQ.
Parameter
LOW FREQUENCY
IN
Range
20, 30, 60, 100 Hz
OFF, ON
Description
Frequency range of the low range filter
(LOW) BOOST
(LOW) ATTEN
0.0 to 10.0
0.0 to 10.0
Boost amount of the low range filter
Attenuation amount of the low range filter
HIGH FREQUENCY
(HIGH) BOOST
3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz
0.0 to 10.0
(HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0
Frequency range of the high range filter
Boost amount of the high range filter
Band width of the high range filter
(HIGH) ATTEN SEL
(HIGH) ATTEN
5k, 10k, 20k Hz
0.0 to 10.0
Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter
Attenuation amount of the high range filter
Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Appendices
■ Dynamic EQ
This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the input signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or expander.
Parameter
BAND ON/OFF
SIDECHAIN CUE
SIDECHAIN LISTEN
FILTER TYPE
FREQUENCY
Q
THRESHOLD
RATIO
MODE
ATTACK/RELEASE
OFF, ON
Range
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf
20.0 to 20.0k Hz
15.0 to 0.50
–80.0 to 10.0 dB
∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50
BELOW, ABOVE
FAST, SLOW, AUTO
Description
Turns the corresponding band on/off
If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/
MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent.
Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter
Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter
Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter
Threshold value at which processing begins to apply
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
Specifies whether the processor will operate when the sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW)
Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is applied
246
Reference Manual
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: .................................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .........These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ..........DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and
FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.
How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value
*a
from the TEMPO and NOTE.
Turn SYNC ON
Change NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
Change TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec
FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz
Example 1:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note
DELAY = new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Appendices
Example 2:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60 / new TEMPO)
= (1/8) x 4 x (60/121)
= 0.2479 (sec)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values
The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values.
You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.
Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects
• You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a
Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the CL series does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32
= 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4
= 1/8
= 1/1
= 1/6
= 2/1
247
Reference Manual
Appendices
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
Mode
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER L
CH ON
PHASE
INSERT
DIRECT OUT
PAN/BALANCE
BALANCE
TO STEREO
TO MONO
LCR
MIX/MATRIX SEND
MIX TO STEREO
—
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
ON
INPUT
OUTPUT
ON
Parameter 1
ON
ON
CSR
MIX 1 ON – MIX24 ON
MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON
MIX 1 POINT – MIX 24 POINT
MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT
MIX 1 LEVEL H – MIX 24 LEVEL H
MIX 1 LEVEL L – MIX 24 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MIX 1/2 PAN – MIX 23/24 PAN
MATRIX1/2 PAN – MATRIX7/8 PAN
TO STEREO ON
TO MONO ON
PAN
Parameter 2
0
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 72
*1
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 72
*1
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–STEREO R
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
248
Mode
MIX TO MATRIX
STEREO TO MATRIX
INPUT EQ
INPUT ATT
INPUT HPF
OUTPUT EQ
ON
FREQ
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW HPF ON
HIGH LPF ON
Parameter 1
MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN – MATRIX 7/8 PAN
MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN – MATRIX 7/8 PAN
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT
Parameter 2
MIX 1–MIX 24
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
Reference Manual
Mode
OUTPUT ATT
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
OUTPUT DYNAMICS1
EFFECT
Parameter 1
OUTPUT
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY/RELEASE H
DECAY/RELEASE L
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN H
GAIN L
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
FILTER FREQ
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 32 L
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
Rack1–8
Parameter 2
MIX1-MIX24
MATRIX1-MATRIX8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
Mode
GEQ
PREMIUM RACK A
PREMIUM RACK B
DCA
MUTE MASTER
Parameter 1
ON A
ON B
GAIN A 1 – GAIN A 31
GAIN B 1 – GAIN B 31
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 64 L
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 64 L
ON
FADER H
FADER L
ON
RECALL SAFE ON
*1. CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48
Parameter 2
Rack1–16
Rack1–8
Rack1–8
DCA 1–DCA 16
MASTER 1–MASTER 8
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GEQ RACK 1A–16B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
PREMIUM RACK 1A–8B
DCA 1–DCA16
Appendices
249
Reference Manual
NRPN parameter assignments
FADER
Parameter
INPUT
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
LEVEL
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX LEVEL
ON
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
INPUT
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
INPUT to MIX9-16 ON
INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX ON
MIX1-8 to STEREO ON
PHASE
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX TO ST
INPUT
From (HEX) To (HEX)
0000 0057
0060 007D
007E
00DE
013E
019E
01FE
025E
02BE
031E
037E
03DE
043E
049E
04FE
0514
052A
0540
0556
056C
0582
0598
05B6
0616
0634
0694
06F4
0754
07B4
0814
0874
08D4
0934
0994
09F4
0A54
0AB4
0ACA
0AE0
0AF6
0B0C
0B22
0B38
0B4E
0B64
0B6C
00D5
0135
0195
01F5
0255
02B5
0315
0375
03D5
0435
0495
04F5
0513
0529
053F
0555
056B
0581
0597
05AD
060D
0633
068B
06EB
074B
07AB
080B
086B
08CB
092B
098B
09EB
0A4B
0AAB
0AC9
0ADF
0AF5
0B0B
0B21
0B37
0B4D
0B63
0B6B
0BC3
INSERT ON
INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/
POST
Parameter
INPUT
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
PRE/POST
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
LEVEL
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
ON
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
PRE/POST
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
From (HEX) To (HEX)
0BCC 0C13
0C2C 0C49
10FA
1102
110A
1112
111A
1122
112A
1132
113A
1142
114A
1152
115A
1162
116A
1172
117A
1182
118A
1192
119A
11A2
11AA
11B2
11BA
11C2
11CA
11D2
11DA
11E2
0C4A
0CAA
0D0A
0D6A
0DCA
0E2A
0E8A
0EEA
0F4A
0FAA
100A
106A
10CA
10D2
10DA
10E2
10EA
10F2
1101
1109
1111
1119
1121
1129
1131
1139
1141
1149
1151
1159
1161
1169
1171
1179
1181
1189
1191
1199
11A1
11A9
11B1
11B9
11C1
11C9
11D1
11D9
11E1
11E9
0CA1
0D01
0D61
0DC1
0E21
0E81
0EE1
0F41
0FA1
1001
1061
10C1
10D1
10D9
10E1
10E9
10F1
10F9
250
INPUT57-64 EQ
INPUT57-64 HPF
Parameter
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
FREQ
MIX1/2
INPUT57-64 to MIX1/2-
7/8 PAN
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MIX3/4
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
ON INPUT57-64 to STEREO
INPUT57-64 RECALL
SAFE
INPUT57-64 to MONO
ON
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS1
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS2
ON
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN reserved
FILTER FREQ
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
RECALL SAFE
ON
EQ INPUT, MIX1-20,
MATRIX, STEREO LR
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR DYNAMICS1
PAN/BALANCE
HIGH GAIN
ATT
HPF ON
LPF ON
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD
DECAY/RELEASE
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
INPUT
Appendices
129A
18EC
196A
19E8
1A66
1AE4
1B44
1BA4
1C04
1C64
1CC4
1D24
1DA2
1E20
1E9E
1F1C
1F9A
2018
2096
1304
1382
1400
147E
14FC
157A
15F8
1676
16F4
1772
17F0
186E
From (HEX) To (HEX)
11EA
11F2
11F1
11F9
11FA
1202
1201
1209
120A
1212
121A
1222
122A
1232
1211
1219
1221
1229
1231
1239
123A
1242
124A
125A
126A
127A
128A
1241
1249
1259
1269
1279
1289
1299
12A9
1969
19C1
1A65
1AE3
1B3B
1B9B
1BFB
1C5B
1CBB
1D1B
1DA1
1E1F
1E9D
1F1B
1F99
2017
2095
20ED
1381
13FF
147D
14FB
1579
15F7
1675
16F3
1771
17EF
186D
18EB
Reference Manual
Parameter
INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16
PAN
MIX9/10
MIX11/12
MIX13/14
MIX15/16
INPUT to MATRIX1/2,
3/4 PAN
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX1/2
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX PAN
MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN
BALANCE
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX TO ST
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX, STEREO LR, MONO to MATRIX PRE/POST
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX ON
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 ON
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
24E4
24F4
2504
2514
2524
2534
2544
2554
2564
2574
2584
2594
25A4
25B4
23B4
23D0
23EC
2408
2424
2440
245C
2478
2494
249A
24A0
24A6
24AC
24B2
24B8
24BE
24C4
24D4
From (HEX) To (HEX)
20F6
2156
214D
21AD
21B6
2216
220D
226D
2276
22D6
2336
234C
2362
2378
238E
22CD
232D
234B
2361
2377
238D
2395
2396 23B3
24F3
2503
2513
2523
2533
2543
2553
2563
2573
2583
2593
25A3
25B3
25C3
23CE
23EA
2406
2422
243E
245A
2476
2492
2498
249E
24A4
24AA
24B0
24B6
24BC
24C2
24D3
24E3
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
Parameter
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MIX8 SEND
MIX1/2
MIX3/4
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM1
PARAM2
PARAM3
PARAM4
PARAM5
PARAM6
PARAM7
PARAM8
PARAM9
PARAM10
PARAM11
PARAM12
PARAM13
EFFECT RACK1-8
PARAM14
PARAM15
PARAM16
PARAM17
PARAM18
PARAM19
PARAM20
PARAM21
PARAM22
PARAM23
PARAM24
PARAM25
PARAM26
PARAM27
PARAM28
PARAM29
PARAM30
PARAM31
PARAM32
272C
2734
273C
2744
274C
2754
275C
2764
276C
2774
26DC
26E4
26EC
26F4
26FC
2704
270C
2714
271C
2724
From (HEX) To (HEX)
25C4
25D4
25D3
25E3
25E4
25F4
25F3
2603
2604
2614
2624
2634
2644
2654
2613
2623
2633
2643
2653
2663
2664
2674
26B4
26BC
26C4
26CC
26D4
2673
2683
26BB
26C3
26CB
26D3
26DB
277C
2784
278C
2794
279C
27A4
27AC
27B4
27BC
2783
278B
2793
279B
27A3
27AB
27B3
27BB
27C3
2733
273B
2743
274B
2753
275B
2763
276B
2773
277B
26E3
26EB
26F3
26FB
2703
270B
2713
271B
2723
272B
Appendices
GEQ RACK1A-3B
FADER
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
Parameter
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
MIX21-24, MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
2866
286C
2872
2878
287E
28E4
28EA
292A
296A
29AA
29EA
2A2A
2A6A
2AAA
2AEA
2B2A
2B6A
2BAA
282A
2830
2836
283C
2842
2848
284E
2854
285A
2860
From (HEX) To (HEX)
27C4
27CA
27C9
27CF
27D0
27D6
27D5
27DB
27DC
27E2
27E8
27EE
27F4
27FA
27E1
27E7
27ED
27F3
27F9
27FF
2800
2806
280C
2812
2818
281E
2824
2805
280B
2811
2817
281D
2823
2829
286B
2871
2877
287D
2883
28E8
2929
2969
29A9
29E9
2A29
2A69
2AA9
2AE9
2B29
2B69
2BA9
2BE9
282F
2835
283B
2841
2847
284D
2853
2859
285F
2865
251
Reference Manual
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX LEVEL
Parameter
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
ON
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 ON
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX21-24, MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX9-24 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST
INSERT MIX21-24, MONO
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
DCA13-16
BALANCE
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
ON
FADER
MIX21-24 (,MONO)
304C
308C
30CC
310C
314C
318C
31CC
320C
324C
3252
3258
2E30
2E70
2EB0
2EF0
2F36
2F46
2F4C
2F8C
2FCC
300C
From (HEX) To (HEX)
2BEA
2BF0
2BEE
2BF4
2BF6
2BFC
2BFA
2C00
2C02
2C08
2C0E
2C14
2C2A
2C30
2C06
2C0C
2C12
2C18
2C2E
2C6F
2C70
2CB0
2CF0
2D30
2D70
2DB0
2DF0
2CAF
2CEF
2D2F
2D6F
2DAF
2DEF
2E2F
308B
30CB
310B
314B
318B
31CB
320B
324B
324F
3255
325C
2E6F
2EAF
2EEF
2F2F
2F45
2F4A
2F8B
2FCB
300B
304B
Parameter
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
MIX21-24, MONO EQ
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 EQ
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
HPF ON
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
HPF
DIRECT OUT INPUT65-
72
FREQ
ON
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MIX21-24, MONO
DYNAMICS1
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
MIX1/2
MIX3/4
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
3538
35B0
35C0
35D0
35E0
35F0
3600
3610
3640
3680
3686
3540
3550
3560
3570
3580
3590
35A0
368C
3692
3698
369E
36A4
36AA
36EA
372A
376A
329A
32A0
32A6
32AC
32B2
3440
3480
34C0
34E4
3508
3518
From (HEX) To (HEX)
325E
3264
3262
3268
326A
3270
326E
3274
3276
327C
3282
3288
328E
3294
327A
3280
3286
328C
3292
3298
329E
32A4
32AA
32B0
32B6
347F
34BF
34E2
3506
3517
3527
3528 3537
353F
35BF
35CF
35DF
35EF
35FF
360F
361F
367F
3684
368A
354F
355F
356F
357F
358F
359F
35AF
3690
3696
369C
36A2
36A8
36E9
3729
3769
37A9
252
Parameter
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX9-24 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GEQ RACK4A-6B
DCA1-12
MUTE MASTER
RECALL SAFE
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4,
MIX1-16
ON
CSR
DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
STEREO
ON
ON
FADER
ON
ON
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
Appendices
38DC
38E2
38E8
38EE
38F4
38FA
3900
3906
390C
3912
396A
39C2
38B2
38B8
38BE
38C4
38CA
38D0
38D6
3864
386A
3870
3876
387C
3882
3888
388E
3894
389A
38A0
38A6
38AC
From (HEX) To (HEX)
37AA
37EA
37E9
3829
382A
3830
382E
3834
3836
383C
3842
3852
3858
385E
383A
3840
3851
3857
385D
3863
3869
386F
3875
387B
3881
3887
388D
3893
3899
389F
38A5
38AB
38B1
38E1
38E7
38ED
38F3
38F9
38FF
3905
390B
3911
3969
39C1
3A01
38B7
38BD
38C3
38C9
38CF
38D5
38DB
3A02
3A42
3A4E
3A5A
3A66
3A41
3A4D
3A59
3A61
3B05
Reference Manual
HA
Parameter
EXTERNAL GAIN1
INPUT GAIN 1
EXTERNAL GAIN2
INPUT GAIN 2
EXTERNAL GAIN3
INPUT GAIN 3
EXTERNAL GAIN4
INPUT GAIN 4
EXTERNAL GAIN5
INPUT GAIN 5
EXTERNAL GAIN6
INPUT GAIN 6
EXTERNAL GAIN7
INPUT GAIN 7
EXTERNAL GAIN8
INPUT GAIN 8
EXTERNAL +48V 1
INPUT +48V 1
EXTERNAL +48V 2
INPUT +48V 2
EXTERNAL +48V 3
INPUT +48V 3
EXTERNAL +48V 4
INPUT +48V 4
EXTERNAL +48V 5
INPUT +48V 5
EXTERNAL +48V 6
INPUT +48V 6
EXTERNAL +48V 7
INPUT +48V 7
EXTERNAL +48V 8
INPUT +48V 8
EXTERNAL HPF1
INPUT HPF1
EXTERNAL HPF2
INPUT HPF2
EXTERNAL HPF3
INPUT HPF3
EXTERNAL HPF4
INPUT HPF4
EXTERNAL HPF5
INPUT HPF5
EXTERNAL HPF6
INPUT HPF6
EXTERNAL HPF7
INPUT HPF7
EXTERNAL HPF8
INPUT HPF8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
MONO
MIX1-16 TO MONO
ON
ON
3BDF
3BE6
3BEF
3BF6
3BFF
3C06
3C0F
3C16
3C1F
3C26
3B8F
3B96
3B9F
3BA6
3BAF
3BB6
3BBF
3BC6
3BCF
3BD6
3C2F
3C36
3C3F
3C46
3C4F
3C56
3C5F
3C66
3C6F
3C76
3C7F
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3B06
3B0F
3B0B
3B15
3B16
3B1F
3B1B
3B25
3B26
3B2F
3B36
3B3F
3B46
3B4F
3B2B
3B35
3B3B
3B45
3B4B
3B55
3B56
3B5F
3B66
3B6F
3B76
3B7F
3B86
3B5B
3B65
3B6B
3B75
3B7B
3B85
3B8B
3C35
3C3B
3C45
3C4B
3C55
3C5B
3C65
3C6B
3C75
3C7B
3C85
3BE5
3BEB
3BF5
3BFB
3C05
3C0B
3C15
3C1B
3C25
3C2B
3B95
3B9B
3BA5
3BAB
3BB5
3BBB
3BC5
3BCB
3BD5
3BDB
3C86 3CC5
3CC6 3CD5
SLOT OUT DELAY
Parameter
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
OMNI OUT DELAY
DIGITAL OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
RATIO
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS1
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS2
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN reserved
FILTER FREQ
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GEQ RACK7A-8B
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
253
3EE8
3EEC
3EF0
3EF4
3EF8
3EFC
3F00
3F04
3F08
3F0C
3EC0
3EC4
3EC8
3ECC
3ED0
3ED4
3ED8
3EDC
3EE0
3EE4
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3CD6
3D06
3D05
3D35
3D36
3D66
3D65
3D6D
3D76
3D86
3D96
3D98
3D9A
3D9C
3D7D
3D8D
3D97
3D99
3D9B
3DD3
3DD4
3E0C
3E44
3E7C
3EB4
3EB8
3EBC
3E0B
3E43
3E7B
3EB3
3EB7
3EBB
3EBF
3F10
3F14
3F18
3F1C
3F20
3F24
3F28
3F2C
3F30
3F13
3F17
3F1B
3F1F
3F23
3F27
3F2B
3F2F
3F33
3EEB
3EEF
3EF3
3EF7
3EFB
3EFF
3F03
3F07
3F0B
3F0F
3EC3
3EC7
3ECB
3ECF
3ED3
3ED7
3EDB
3EDF
3EE3
3EE7
Parameter
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 TO
STEREO
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24 TO MONO
ATT
ON
ON
LCR IN65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS1
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS2
ON
CSR
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN reserved
FILTER FREQ
Appendices
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3F34 3F56
3F58 3F67
3F68
3F80
3F98
3FB0
3FC0
3FD0
3FE0
3FF0
3F7F
3F97
3FAF
3FBF
3FCF
3FDF
3FEF
3FFF
Reference Manual
Appendices
Mixing parameter operation applicability
This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter.
It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.
■ Input channels
Parameter
HA
Gain
Gain Compensation
+48V
Phase
Digital Gain
Name, Icon, Color
Input Patch
Out Patch
Insert
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Direct Out
Out Patch
On, Level
Point
HPF
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Dynamics2
Key-In Source
Key-In Filter
Others
Key-In Source
Others
On
To Mix
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
To Matrix
DELAY
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post ms
ON
To Stereo
To Mono
Stereo
*1
O
*10
O
O
*10
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
O
O
*10
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
O
CHANNEL LINK
HA
*10
HA
DIGITAL GAIN
*10
INPUT INSERT
INPUT INSERT
DIRECT OUT
DIRECT OUT
INPUT HPF
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
INPUT MIX ON
*2
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
INPUT MATRIX ON
*3
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*3
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*3
INPUT DELAY
*10
INPUT DELAY
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
ALL
O
Parameter Select button
HA, GLOBAL HA
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
DIGITAL GAIN
INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME
INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
INPUT INSERT
INPUT INSERT
INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT HPF
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT MIX ON
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MATRIX ON
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT DELAY
INPUT DELAY
INPUT TO ST
INPUT TO MONO
USER LEVEL
HA
HA
HA
HA
HA
INPUT NAME
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
HA
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
254
Reference Manual
Parameter Stereo
*1
Pan/balance
Pan Mode
LCR
On
Fader
On
CSR
Mode
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
Fade Time, On
Channel Link O
Cue O
Key In Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste
O
O
O
O
O
*6
O
*11
O
O
O
O
O
O
*10
CHANNEL LINK
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
INPUT CH ON
INPUT FADER
*10
INPUT MUTE
INPUT DCA
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
ALL Parameter Select button
O INPUT TO ST
*5
O
O
O
O
*5
*5
*5
INPUT CH ON
INPUT FADER
*5
*5
*9
GLOBAL CH LINK
USER LEVEL
INPUT FADER/ON
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
INPUT FADER/ON
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
*1 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1–8.
*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1–8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when assigned to either a Send source channel or a Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*10 Operates differentially
*11 Balance only
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
Appendices
255
Reference Manual
Appendices
■ MIX Channels
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Out Patch
Insert
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
Others
On
Level
To Matrix
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
To Stereo
To Mono
Pan/Balance
LCR
On
Fader
From Input
On
CSR
Mode
On
Level
Parameter
Pan/Balance
Linked for a stereo pair
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
O
O
*13
O
O
*11
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
ALL
O
Parameter Select button
MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
O
O
O
O
MIX INSERT
MIX INSERT
MIX EQ
MIX EQ
MIX DYNA1
MIX DYNA1
MIX MATRIX ON
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX TO ST
MIX MONO
MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
O
O
*5
*5
*5
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
*4
MIX FADER/ON
*4
MIX FADER/ON
*4
MIX PROCESSING
*4
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
MIX CH ON
MIX FADER
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
*5
*9
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
WITH MIX SEND
*4
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Mute Assign
Fade Time, On
Pre/Post
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste
O
O
*6
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*13 Linked only for stereo MATRIX
256
Reference Manual
Appendices
■ MATRIX Channels
Parameter
Linked for a stereo pair
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Insert
Att
EQ
Out Patch
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
Others O
Balance
On
Fader O
O
O
O
O
O
O
On O
From Input
From Mix
From Stereo/Mono
Level
Pan/Balance
O
O
*11
Mute Assign
Pre/Post O
O
Fade Time, On O
*6
Cue O
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ALL
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
Parameter Select button
MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
MATRIX CH ON
O
O
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
*5 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
*9
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX FADER/ON
MATRIX FADER/ON
STORE
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
257
Reference Manual
Appendices
■ STEREO, MONO Channels
Parameter
Linked for a stereo pair
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Out Patch
Insert
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
Others
On
To Matrix
Level
Pan/Balance
O
O
O
O
Pre/Post O
Balance
On
Fader
Mute Assign
Fade Time, On O
*6
Cue O
Mute Safe
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*13
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ALL
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
USER LEVEL
Parameter Select button
STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME
STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
O
O
O
O
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
STEREO, MONO CH ON
STEREO, MONO FADER
*5
*9
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
*4
*4
*4
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
■ DCA
Parameter
Name, Icon, Color
On
Fader
Fade Time, On
Input DCA Assign
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL Parameter Select button
O
O
O
O
*5
DCA LEVEL/ON
DCA LEVEL/ON
*9
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
USER LEVEL
DCA MASTER
DCA MASTER
DCA MASTER
STORE
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
258
Reference Manual
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
FUNCTION
NO ASSIGN
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
BRIGHTNESS
CH ON
CH SELECT
CL EDITOR
CONTROL
—
PARAMETER 1
LATCH
UNLATCH
BANK CHANGE
SPECIFIC CH
INC
DEC
SPECIFIC CH
MASTER
SENDS ON FADER
OVERVIEW
CUSTOM FADER BANK
SELECTED CHANNEL
—
—
—
—
*4)
—
PARAMETER 2 Explanation
No assignment.
Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is pressed.
Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while pressed.
Toggle between the brightness settings stored in A and B.
Switch the CH ON/OFF.
Increment or decrement the selected channel number.
Select a channel from list 1).
*1)
—
—
CH 1-16 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH17-32 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH33-48 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH49-64 {CL5/CL3}
CH65-72 {CL5}
ST IN
MIX1-16
MIX17-24
MATRIX
STEREO/MONO
DCA
A1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
A2 {CL5/CL3}
A3 {CL3}
B1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
B2 {CL3/CL1}
B3 {CL1}
B4 {CL1}
C1 {CL5}
C2 {CL5}
C3 {CL5}
C4 {CL5}
C5 {CL5}
C6 {CL5}
—
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
FUNCTION
CL EDITOR
CONTROL
CUE
PARAMETER 1
LIBRARY
PREMIUM RACK
LIBRARY
PATCH EDITOR
RACK EDITOR
METER
GROUP/LINK
SCENE
OUTPUT
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH
Appendices
PARAMETER 2
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
INPUT EQ LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
INPUT CH LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
Portico5033 LIBRARY
Portico5043 LIBRARY
U76 LIBRARY
Opt-2A LIBRARY
EQ-1A LIBRARY
DynamicEQ LIBRARY
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH
OUTPUT INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT PATCH
PATCH LIST
RACK
GEQ 1–16
EFFECT 1–8
PREMIUM 1A
PREMIUM 1B
:
PREMIUM 8A
PREMIUM 8B
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
DCA GROUP
MUTE GROUP
CHANNEL LINK
SCENE MEMORY
RECALL SAFE
FADE TIME
FOCUS RECALL
—
Explanation
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
Switch CUE on/off
*2) CUE the channel selected from list 2).
259
Reference Manual
FUNCTION
EFFECT
BYPASS
PARAMETER 1
EFFECT RACK1–8
PREMIUM RACK1A
PREMIUM RACK1B
:
PREMIUM RACK8A
PREMIUM RACK8B
LATCH
GAIN KNOB
FUNCTION
UNLATCH
—
—
PARAMETER 2 Explanation
GEQ FREQ
BANK
GPI OUT
INC
DEC
LATCH
UNLATCH
HELP
HOME
METER
MIDI
—
PORT1–PORT5
— —
SELECTED CH VIEW
OVERVIEW
TOGGLE
—
—
—
PEAK HOLD ON
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
NOTE ON
—
PGM 0–128
CC 1–31, 33–95,
102–119
NOTE ON C-2 (0)
:
NOTE ON G 8 (127)
Toggle the function of the GAIN knob
(ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when
DIGITAL GAIN is selected.
Assign the function of the GAIN knob
(ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while held down.
* However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen etc., this will remain lit until the next time it is pressed.
Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ
EDIT screen.
Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active.
Make GPI OUT active only while pressed.
Opens and closes the HELP pop-up window.
Operating the controllers on the panel
(excluding faders), or controllers on the screen, while holding down this key will display the related information.
Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
Displays the OVERVIEW screen.
Each press of the key will alternately display the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the
OVERVIEW screen.
Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit when on.
Transmit the corresponding MIDI message.
Appendices
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
OUTPUT
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
—
—
PARAMETER 2 Explanation
Switch MONITOR on/off.
While holding down this key, press the SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL]
LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching.
MONITOR
SOURCE SELECT
STEREO L/R
MONO(C)
LCR
PB OUT
OMNI1-2
OMNI3-4
OMNI5-6
OMNI7-8
DEFINE
Recall the selected signal to the monitor.
MUTE
MASTER
NUENDO
LIVE
OSCILLATOR
MUTE GROUP 1
:
MUTE GROUP 8
ALL MUTE
TRANSPORT
PEAK CLEAR
OSCILLATOR ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIRECT ASSIGN
—
—
GO TO PROJECT START
GO TO PREV MARKER
REWIND
FAST FORWARD
GO TO NEXT MARKER
GO TO PROJECT END
CYCLE
STOP
START
REC
EASY RECORDING
—
—
—
*1)
Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off.
Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on/off together.
Operate the transport functions of Nuendo
Live.
Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live screen.
Switch the OSC on/off.
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of a channel to switch the assignment on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
Assign the oscillator to the channel selected from list 1).
260
Reference Manual
FUNCTION
PAGE
CHANGE
RECORDER
SCENE
PARAMETER 1
BOOKMARK
DIRECT PLAY
INC RECALL
REC RECALL
DIRECT RECALL
RECALL UNDO
STORE UNDO
MIX1-16/MIX17-24,
MATRIX
SEND
ENCODER
MODE
MIX1–MIX24
MTRX1–MTRX8
SENDS ON
FADER
MIX ON FADER
MATRIX ON FADER
SENDS ON FADER
—
—
SCENE #000–#300
—
—
—
—
PARAMETER 2
BOOKMARK with “SEL” —
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
CLOSE POPUP
—
—
PLAY/PAUSE, STOP,
FF/NEXT,
REW/PREVIOUS, REC
TRANSPORT
AUTO REC
REC & START
NO ASSIGN
(TITLE 1)
:
Explanation
Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (press and release the key within two seconds). Popup screens can also be memorized. In the case of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized.
Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the addition of the SEL status.
Display the previous/next page.
Close the displayed popup window.
Display the previous/next page.
Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY.
Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is executed during recording, the file being recorded will first be closed, and then recording will continue with a new file.
Start recording immediately without entering record-ready mode.
The specified audio file will be played once from the beginning. Audio files to be played should be saved in the SONGS folder inside the
YPE folder. Please note that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the root directory or in any other folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will move to
\YPE\SONGS\.
Recall the scene of the next existing number.
Recall the scene of the previous existing number.
Directly recall the scene of the specified number.
Execute RECALL UNDO.
Execute STORE UNDO.
If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch the function of the Selected Channel section’s send encoders from TO MIX1-16/TO MIX17-24,
MATRIX.
Switches the MIX ON FADER function for the selected MIX on and off.
Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function for the selected MATRIX on and off.
Switches the MIX ON FADER function on and off.
Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function on and off.
Switches the SENDS ON FADER function on and off.
Appendices
FUNCTION
SET BY SEL
PARAMETER 1
SET [+48V]
SET [Ø]
SET [INSERT ON]
SET [DIRECT OUT ON]
SET [PRE SEND]
SET [TO STEREO]
SET [TO MONO]
SET [TO LCR]
SET [GAIN
COMPENSATION]
SET DEFAULT
VALUE
—
SET
NOMINAL
VALUE
—
—
—
—
TALKBACK
TAP TEMPO
TALKBACK ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIRECT ASSIGN
CURRENT PAGE
EFFECT RACK1–8
LATCH
UNLATCH
—
*3)
—
—
PARAMETER 2 Explanation
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off.
If SET [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON
FADER” mode is engaged while you are holding down the [SEL] key.
While holding down this key, press a knob in the Selected Channel or Centralogic section to reset it to the default value.
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the fader of that channel to nominal level.
Switch TALKBACK on/off.
Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching.
Assign TALKBACK to the channel selected from list 3).
Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen.
Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect.
*1) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8,
ST L, ST R, MONO(C)
*2) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8,
STEREO, MONO(C)
*3) MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO(C)
*4) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8,
STEREO, MONO(C), DCA1–DCA16
261
Reference Manual
Functions that can be assigned to
USER DEFINED knobs
FUNCTION
NO ASSIGN
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
BRIGHTNESS
CUE
DYNAMICS1
DYNAMICS2
EQ
LAMP
PANEL
SCREEN
CH COLOR
NAME
INPUT PFL TRIM
DCA TRIM
OUTPUT PFL TRIM
CUE LEVEL
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RATIO
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
THRESHOLD
RATIO
FREQUENCY
ATTACK
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
ATT
LOW Q
LOW FREQUENCY
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQUENCY
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQUENCY
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQUENCY
HIGH GAIN
*2)
*13)
*4)
*2)
262
Appendices
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL HA
HPF
I/O DEVICE
INPUT DELAY
INPUT GAIN
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE
MONITOR
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT PORT
TO MIX LEVEL
TO MATRIX LEVEL
TO MIX PAN
TO MATRIX PAN
TO ST/MONO
TOUCH AND TURN
PARAMETER 1
GAIN1–GAIN8
FREQUENCY
GAIN1–GAIN32
DELAY TIME
ANALOG GAIN
DIGITAL GAIN
CTRL 1–CTRL 31
CTRL 33–CTRL 95
CTRL 102–CTRL 119
DIMMER LEVEL
TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL
MONITOR DELAY
MONITOR FADER
LEVEL
SINE WAVE FREQUENCY
HPF
LPF
WIDTH
INTERVAL
DELAY TIME
GAIN
MIX1–MIX24
MATRIX1–MATRIX8
MIX1/2–MIX23/24
MATRIX1/2–MATRIX7/8
PAN/BAL
CSR
PARAMETER 2
*10)
*4)
*11)
*3)
*4)
*12)
*3)
*7)
*3)
*7)
*5)
*2) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24,
MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
*3) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R
*4) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8
*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24
*7) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24,
ST L, ST R, MONO (C)
*10) # 1–# 6
*11) REMOTE HA # 1–# 8
*12) DANTE 1–DANTE64, OMNI 1–OMNI 8, SLOT1 1–SLOT1 16, SLOT2 1–SLOT2 16, SLOT3 1–SLOT3 16,
DIGITAL OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R
*13) SELECTED CH, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
Reference Manual
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders
GAIN PAN
O
O
O
ASSIGN FUNCTION
PAN/BALANCE
ANALOG GAIN
DIGITAL GAIN
SELECTED SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MIX17 SEND
MIX18 SEND
MIX19 SEND
MIX20 SEND
MIX21 SEND
MIX22 SEND
MIX23 SEND
MIX24 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
HPF FREQUENCY
DYNAMICS1 THRESHOLD
DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MIX9
MIX10
MIX11
MIX12
MIX13
MIX14
MIX15
MIX16
MIX17
MIX18
MIX19
MIX20
MIX21
MIX22
MIX23
MIX24
MTRX1
MTRX2
MTRX3
MTRX4
MTRX5
MTRX6
MTRX7
MTRX8
HPF
THRE1
THRE2
MIX2
MIX3
MIX4
MIX5
MIX6
MIX7
MIX8
PARAMETER 1
PAN
BAL
A.GAIN
D.GAIN
MIX1-MTRX8
Depends on status
MIX1
PARAMETER 2
*1
*1
*2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*4
*5
*6
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
263
Appendices
*1 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or digital gain.
*2 The send destination that is the target of Sends On Fader will be selected.
*3 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch the PRE/POST setting of the corresponding send or will switch the corresponding send on/off when pressed.
*4 Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch the high-pass filter on/off.
*5 Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch
DYNAMICS 1 on/off.
*6 Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch
DYNAMICS 2 on/off.
Reference Manual
MIDI Data Format
This section explains the format of the data that the CL series is able to understand, send, and receive.
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored)
1.2 NOTE ON (9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (Non-
Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110) messages.
Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is
ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the
[CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes ” on page 248 .
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is
ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and
DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be
assigned, refer to “ Parameters that can be assigned to control changes ” on page 248
.
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA
ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the
parameters that can be assigned, refer to “ Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
” on
CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
00 Control number (00)
STATUS
DATA
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
1011nnnn Bn Control change
20 Control number (32)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data paramSteps = paramMax – paramMin + 1; add mod curValue
= paramWidth / paramSteps;
= paramWidth – add * paramSteps;
= paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152 steps paramWidth = 2097152;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3-4) When only High data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128; if ( rxValue > paramWidth) rxValue = paramWidth; param = ( rxValue–mod / 2) / add;
Appendices
If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change
01100010 62 NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
01100011 63 NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
00000110 06 Data entry MSB DATA
STATUS
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB
* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted.
1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
Reception
If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx] is
ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memory, effect librarya nd premium rack library are recalled according to the settings of the
[PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].
Transmission
If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the
[PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library has been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
If SINGLE is selected
You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.
You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
A bank of up to 16 can be specified.
If MULTI is selected
The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.
The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages will not be added.
You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
264
Reference Manual
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
2.1 SONG SELECT (F3)
Reception
Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder.
STATUS 11110011 F3 Song select
Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127)
2.2 TIMING CLOCK (F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing
2.4 SYSTEM RESET (FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running
Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS 11111111 FF System reset
3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.1 MMC
< MMC STOP >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No.
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND
EOX
00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000001 01 Stop(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No.
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND
EOX
00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000010 02 Play(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC DEFERED PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00000011 03 Deferred Play(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC RECORD STROBE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts recording.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00000110 06 Record strobe
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC PAUSE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00001001 09 Pause(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
3.2 BULK DUMP
This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within the unit.
The basic format is as follows.
Command
F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm … mm dd dd … ee F7 rx/tx
F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm … mm dd dd F7 rx
Function rx/tx BULK DUMP DATA
BULK DUMP REQUEST
The CL series uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
Module Name(mm)
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
“PEFFECT_”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
Data Number(dd)
*1) *14) *15) *16)
*2) *7) *8)
*3) *9) *10) *11)
*4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *21) *22)
*17) *7) *8)
*18) *9) *10) *11)
*5) *12)
*6) *13)
*19)
*20)
*20)
*20)
*20)
265
Appendices
Module Name(mm)
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
Mixer Setup
Outport Setup
Monitor Setup
MIDI Setup
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“DANTEIN_”
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
Data Number(dd)
*20)
*20)
*23)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
*1) 0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),
*2) 1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only)
*3) 1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only)
*4) 1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only)
*5) 0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
*6) 1–199 Effect Library Number (1–27 Request Only)
*7) 512–583 Input 1-72,
*8) 584–599 STIN 1L-8R,
*9) 768–791 MIX 1-24,
*10) 1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8,
*11) 1280–1282 STEREO L-C,
*12) 512–530 GEQ 1-19, 531–538 EFFECT GEQ 1-8,
*13) 512–519 EFFECT 1-8,
*14) 512 Current Data,
*15) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,
*16) 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data,
*17) 0–199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*18) 0–199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*19) 512–527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, … 8A, 8B
*20) 0–100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only)
*21) 1536–1607 Input 1-72 (for Dynamics2),
*22) 1608–1623 STIN 1L-8R (for Dunamics2),
*23) 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only)
Data is lost when you write to the preset library.
The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a CL series.
To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT
(LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement, and set bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a
Bulk Dump Request is received.
A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump
Request.
In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of 7-bit data.
Reference Manual
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
} b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
Reception
This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a
PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which CONTROL
CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.
Command
F0 43 1n 3E 19 … F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 19 … F7
PARAMETER REQUEST rx/tx Function rx/tx CL series native parameter change rx/tx CL series native parameter request
4 PARAMETER CHANGE details
4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP
4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL CHANGE
EVENT LIST].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
EOX
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00010010 19 CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh Element no High.
0eeeeeee el Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih Index no High.
0iiiiiii il Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl Channel no Low.
0ddddddd dd Data
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00010010 19 CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh Element no High.
0eeeeeee el Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih Index no High.
EOX
0iiiiiii il Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl Channel no Low.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
266
“LibStr__”
“LibRcl__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibUnRcl”
“LibStrUd”
“LibRclUd”
Appendices
4.1.3 Data category
Data Category
0x01 00000001
Name
Current Scene /Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
4.2 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY STORE, RECALL –
4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when
[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Number Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.2.2 Function Name
Function Name
Store
Recall
Unknown Factor Store
Unknown Factor Recall
Store Undo (only Score)
Recall Undo (only Scene)
Reference Manual
4.2.3 Module Name
Module Name
Scene
Input EQ
Output EQ
Dynamics
Input CH
Output CH
GEQ
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
Effect
Portico5033
Portico5043
U76
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“U76_____”
Opt-2A
EQP-1A
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
DynamicEQ “DYNAEQ__”
Dante Input Patch “DANTEIN_”
Function
“LibStr__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibRcl__”
“LibUnRcl”
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
0
0
1-199
0-199
0-199
0-199
1-199
0-100
0-10
0
1-199
1-199
28-199
1-100
1-10
0-300
1-199
1-199
28-199
1-100
1-10
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
1-199
Number
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
1-199
1-199
1-199 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx
0
0
0
0
*7)
*9)
*5)
0
*5)
Channel*1)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*6)
0
0
0
0
0
*5)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*7)
*9)
*5)
*5)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*6)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
Function
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
“LibStrUd”
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
“LibRclUd” SCENE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Number
0
0
*6)
*7)
*9)
*5)
Channel*1)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) 0:CH1
72:ST IN 1L
*2) 256:MIX 1
*3) 512:MATRIX 1
– 71:CH72
– 87:ST IN 8R
– 279:MIX 24
– 519: MATRIX 8
*4) 1024:STEREO L – 1026:STEREO C
*5) 512:will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
*6) 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, … 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B
38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B,
40: EFFECT GEQ2A, … 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B
*7) 0:Effect1- 7:Effect8
*8) 1280:CH1
1352:ST IN 1L
–
–
1351:CH72
1367:ST IN 8R
*9) 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B,
2: Premium Rack 2A, … 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx
4.3 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY EDIT –
4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE
ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE).
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
Appendices
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0sssssss sh number -source start High
0sssssss sl number -source start Low
0eeeeeee eh number -source end High
0eeeeeee el number -source end Low
0ddddddd dh number -destination start High
0ddddddd dl number -destination to start Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.3.2 Function Name
Function Name
Copy
Paste
Clear
Cut
Insert
Edit Undo
“LibCpy__”
“LibPst__”
“LibClr__”
“LibCut__”
“LibIns__”
“LibEdtUd”
4.3.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“DANTEIN_”
Function
Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
267
Reference Manual
4.4 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE –
4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library title will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE
ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000001 "A" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh Element High
0eeeeeee el Element Low
0iiiiiii ih Index High
0iiiiiii il Index Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
0000dddd dd Data28~31bit
0ddddddd dd Data21~27bit
0ddddddd dd Data14~20bit
0ddddddd dd Data7~13bit
0ddddddd dd Data0~6bit
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000001 "A" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh Element High
0eeeeeee el Element Low
0iiiiiii ih Index High
0iiiiiii il Index Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.4.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“DANTEIN_”
Number
0-300 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-40:response only)
1-200 (1-3:response only)
1-200 (1-41:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-27:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-10 (0:response only)
268
Appendices
4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE
4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
When CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change.
This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only. Top number is requested number or more.
-Example-
SCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
Request Number: 0
Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
Request Number: 8
Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
Request Number: 11
Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
Request Number: 102
Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000101 "E" (ASCII CODE)
01111000 "x" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01110011 "s" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0sssssss ss Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data )
0nnnnnnn nh Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Request Number Low
0ttttttt th Top Number High
0ttttttt tl Top Number Low
0eeeeeee eh End Number High
0eeeeeee el End Number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Reference Manual
4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000101 "E" (ASCII CODE)
01111000 "x" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01110011 "s" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Request Number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.5.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNL”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“DANTEIN_”
Number
1-300
41-200
4-200
42-200
1-200
1-200
1-200
55-200
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-10
4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE –
4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "C" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01101001 "o" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "l" (ASCII CODE)
01010101 "U" (ASCII CODE)
01101110 "n" (ASCII CODE)
01010011 "S" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Number Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.6.2 Function Name
Function
“ColUnStr” Setup
User Defined Key
Program Change
Control Change
Number
0
0
0
0 tx/rx tx tx tx tx
4.6.3 Module Name
Module Name
Mixer Setting
Outport Setting
Monitor Setting
MIDI Setting
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
Appendices
Module Name
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE –
4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type).
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001101 "M"
01101111 "o"
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
01100100 "d"
01000110 "F"
01111000 "x"
01010100 "T"
01110010 "r"
01100111 "g"
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0eeeeeee ee Effect number (0:RACK1 - 7:RACK8)
0ppppppp pp Release:0, Press:1
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.7.2 Module Name
Module Name
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
“FRZPLAY_”
“FRZREC__”
Number
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
This will not work when the Effect Type is different.
269
Reference Manual
Appendices
4.8 FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL –
4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01000011 "C"
01101000 "h"
01101100 "l"
01010000 "P"
01101001 "i"
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
01110010 "r"
01000011 "C"
01110000 "p"
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0sssssss sh Source Channel Number H *1)
0sssssss sl Source Channel Number L *1)
0ddddddd dh Destination Channel Number H *1)
0ddddddd dl Destination Channel Number L *1)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.8.2 Module Name
Module Name
Pair On (with Copy)
Pair On (with Reset Both)
Pair Off
“PAIRONCP”
“PAIRONRS”
“PAIROFF_”
*1) 0 :CH1
256 :MIX 1
- 71:CH72
- 279:MIX 24
512 :MATRIX 1 - 519: MATRIX 8
4.9 LEVEL METER DATA
4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds. If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds.
Receive
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled.
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
0ddddddd dd Data1
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. the corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be immediately stopped [disabled].
Transmission
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
0ccccccc ch Count H
0ccccccc cl Count L
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
270
Reference Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Message xxx Parameters Copied.
xxx Parameters Initialized.
xxx Parameters Pasted.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off!
Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8 Sources!
Cannot Assign!
Cannot Bookmark This Popup.
Cannot Mount This Type of Device in This
Position.
Cannot Paste!
Cannot Recall!
Cannot Select This Channel.
Cannot Store!
Cannot Undo!
Channel Copied.
Channel Moved.
Channel Returned to Default Settings.
Couldn’t Access File.
Couldn’t Write File.
Current User Changed. [xxx]
Directory Not Empty!
Meaning
Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
Parameter xxx was initialized.
Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off.
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight.
In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3/CL1, you attempted to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model.
This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot be mounted.
Cannot paste the character string.
Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason.
Failed to store a scene memory or library.
You pressed the [UNDO] button when Undo was not available.
Channel settings have been copied.
Channel settings have been moved.
Channel settings have been returned to the default settings.
File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason.
File could not be saved to the USB flash drive.
Current user was changed to [xxx].
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory.
EDITOR: Data Framing Error!
EDITOR: Data Overrun!
EDITOR: Rx Buffer Full!
Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor.
EDITOR: Tx Buffer Full!
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
External HA Connection Conflict!
External Power Supply is Cut Off!
File Access is Busy!
Too much data is being received at the CL Editor input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the CL Editor output port.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen.
External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was stored.
The PW800 (EXT) power supply connected to the CL series console has stopped operating.
The following operation has not been performed yet because the
USB flash drive is being accessed.
271
Appendices
File Already Exists!
File Error [xx]!
File Protected!
Flash Memory Initializing Finished.
Help File Not Found!
Illegal Address!
Loading Aborted.
Loading Finished.
Low Battery!
Memory Error! All Memories were
Initialized.
Message
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Network.
Illegal Storage Format!
Internal Power Supply is Cut Off!
Internal Power Supply is Turned On.
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
Maximum Number of Audio Files Exceeded!
Meaning
The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create.
Internal file access error
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is write-protected.
Memory initialization has been completed.
The help file has not been loaded.
The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid.
Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document).
The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported.
The internal (INT) power supply has stopped operating.
Alternatively, some other problem has occurred. Contact a
Yamaha service center listed at the end of the owner’s manual
(separate document).
The internal (INT) power supply has started up normally.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the
DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen.
Loading from USB flash drive was aborted.
Finished loading from USB flash drive.
The backup battery voltage is low.
The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to failure of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual (separate document).
MIDI: Data Framing Error!
MIDI: Data Overrun!
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full!
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full!
An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
No Access From Recorder!
No channel selected.
No Copy Item Selected.
No Corresponding Help Items.
No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit.
No Response from External HA.
No Response from I/O DEVICE.
Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.
To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.
In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen.
In the Global Paste screen, you attempted to paste without having selected an item to paste.
The corresponding section was not found in the Hlep file.
The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag.
No response from an external AD8HR.
The I/O devices not responding.
Reference Manual
Page Bookmarked.
Password Changed.
PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off.
PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy!
Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding now.
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
Processing Aborted.
PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This Function.
PREVIEW Mode : Disabled
PREVIEW Mode : Enabled
Re-Enter Password!
RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] !
Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!
RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off.
Removed from the Channel Link group.
Saving Aborted.
Saving Finished.
Message
SCENE #xxx is Empty!
SCENE #xxx is Protected!
SCENE #xxx is Read Only!
Scene Playback Link Canceled!
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full!
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full!
Some Song Files Are Unidentified.
Song File Not Found!
Meaning
The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
The password has been changed.
CUE was cancelled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen.
Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress.
You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when patching was not possible.
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. If a malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual (separate document).
Processing was interrupted.
The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used during Preview.
Preview was disabled.
Preview was enabled.
When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a second time.
A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen.
Operation of the button was cancelled because time is required for recorder processing.
CUE was cancelled for RECORDER IN because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen.
The channel was removed from the link group.
Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted.
Finished saving to USB flash drive.
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
The audio playback link for the scene was cancelled.
Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port.
Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified might be used for DIRECT PLAY or PLAY BACK LINK.
The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a
USER DEFINED key does not exist.
STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error!
STAGEMIX: Data Overrun!
STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full!
Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix.
Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port.
272
Appendices
Storage Full!
Storage Not Found!
Storage Not Ready!
Sync Error! [xxx]
Tap Operation Ignored.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to
Flex15GEQ.
Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!
Wrong Audio File Format!
Wrong Password!
Message
STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full!
This Operation is Not Allowed.
Too Large Files! Loading Failed.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!
Unassigned Encoder.
Unsupported File Format!
USB Currently Active for Recorder function!
USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!
USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped!
USB Memory Full !
USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.
USB Memory is Protected!
USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder
Stopped.
USB over current Error! Disconnect USB device.
Wrong Word Clock!
You Cannot Create User Key.
Meaning
Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port.
The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the USB flash drive.
The USB flash drive could not be recognized.
Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready.
The CL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal.
Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.
This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission.
Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes.
Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has exceeded the rated value.
Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated.
The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an unsupported format.
Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory recorder is recording or playing.
The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive.
Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash drive processing.
Can’t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating.
The USB flash drive’s Protect setting is turned on.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating.
The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB current.
Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was lost.
The format of the audio file is invalid.
The password you input was incorrect.
The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate.
The current user does not have permission to create a user key.
Reference Manual
Electrical characteristics
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms
■ Frequency Response.
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
Output RL
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
PHONES 8 Ω
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz
Conditions
GAIN: +66dB
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–1.5
0.0 0.5
dB
–3.0 0.0 0.5
■ Gain Error.
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
Internal OSC
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @1 kHz
Output
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
PHONES
RL
8 Ω
Conditions
Input level : –62 dBu , GAIN : +66 dB
Output level +4.0 dBu (Typ.)
Input level : +10 dBu , GAIN : –6 dB
Output level +4.0 dBu (Typ.)
Full scale output, Output level :
+24.0 dBu (Typ.)
–30 dBFs, phones level control : max.
Output level 0 dBu (Typ.)
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–2.0
–0.5
–0.5
0
0
0
2.0
0.5
0.5
dB
■ Total Harmonic Distortion.
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
Internal OSC
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
Output
OMNI OUT 1-8
RL
600 Ω
Conditions
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: +66dB
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: –6dB
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Full Scale Output @1 kHz
PHONES 8 Ω
Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level
Control: Max.
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
0.1
0.05
0.02
%
0.2
* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz
■ Hum & Noise.
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
All INPUTs
—
—
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise
Output RL Conditions
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Master fader at nominal level and all
OMNI IN 1-8 in faders at nominal level.
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off
PHONES 8 Ω
Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level
Control Min.
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–128
EIN
–62
–84 –79
–70
–88
–88 dBu
* Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.
273
Appendices
■ Dynamic Range.
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
—
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
Output RL Conditions
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: –6dB
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω DA Converter
* Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter.
■ Sampling Frequency
Parameter
External Clock
Internal Clock
Frequency
Range
Jitter of PLL
Frequency
Accuracy
Jitter
Conditions
Fs= 44.1 kHz
Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz –4.0%)
Fs= 48 kHz
Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz –4.0%)
DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz
DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Min.
–200
–50
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
108 dB
112 dB
Typ.
44.1
48
Max.
+200
10
+50
4.429
4.069
Unit ppm ns kHz ppm ns
Reference Manual
Mixer Basic Parameters
■ Libraries
Name
Scene Memory
Input CH Library
Output CH Library
Input EQ Library
Output EQ Library
Dynamics Library
Effect Library
GEQ Library
Premium Rack Library
Portico5033
Portico5043
U76
Opt-2A
EQ-1A
DynamicEQ
Dante Input Patch Library
Number
Preset 1 + User 300
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 40 + User 159
Preset 3 + User 196
Preset 41 + User 158
Preset 27 + User 172
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 199 200
Preset 1 + User 10 11
■ Input Function
Function
Phase
Digital Gain
HPF
Attenuator
4 Band
Equalizer
Insert
Direct Out
Parameter
Normal/Reverse
–96 dB to +24 dB
Slope= 12 dB/Oct
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
–96 dB to 0 dB
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Total
301
200
200
199
199
199
199
200
Function
Dynamics 1
Dynamics2
Fader
On
Pan/Balance
DCA Group
Mute Group
Mix Send
Matrix Send
LCR Pan
DELAY
Parameter
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
Threshold= Gate: –72 dB to 0 dB
Others: –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Hold= 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec
Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Releace= 48 kHz: 5msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Range= Gate: –∞ dB to 0 dB
Ducking: –70 dB to 0 dB
Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF
Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz
TYPE= HPF, BPF
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On/Off
Position L63 to R63
Pan Mode: Pan/Balance
16 Groups
8 Groups
24 sends
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes
Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
8 Sends
Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
CSR= 0% to 100%
0 ms to 1000 msec
274
Appendices
■ Output Function
Function
Attenuator
4Band Equalizer
Insert
Dynamics 1
Fader
On
Pan/Balance
Mute Group
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix
Oscillator
Parameter
–96 dB to 0 dB
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to + 18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 MIX24/
MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On/Off
Position L63 to R63
8 Groups
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step)
On/Off= Software control
■ Output Port
Function
Out Port Delay 0 msec to 1000 msec
Parameter
Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse
Gain –96 to +24 dB
■ Processor
Function
GEQ
Effects
Premium Rack
Parameter
Parameter
31 bands x 16(24) or 15 bands x 32(48) systems
Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems
Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x
8 systems
Reference Manual
M IDI Implementation Chart
Appendices
275
Reference Manual
Index
A
Assignable encoders .......................................
Functions that can be assigned.................
Audio file (links to a scene recall) .................. 94
C
Calibration function..............
,
Cascade connections ......................................
Centralogic section...........................................
Channel
Copying, moving, initializing .....................
Channel color...................................
,
Channel library ...........................................
Channel Link.....................................................
Channel name displays ..................................
Console Lock...................................................
Control Changes
Control parameters ....................................
Cue function.............................................. 97
,
Operating.....................................................
Custom fader bank .........................................
D
Dante audio network ............................... 15
,
DAW .................................................................. 25
DCA groups ...................................................... 64
Directly outputting...........................................
Dynamics .....................................................
Libraries .........................................................
DYNAMICS Library List...............................
Dynamics Parameters ....................................
E
Effect.................................................................
Libraries .......................................................
Effect Type List ...............................................
Effects and tempo synchronization .............
Effects Parameters ..........................................
Electrical characteristics ................................
EQ ....................................................................... 56
Libraries .........................................................
EQ Library List................................................
External device..................................................
External head amp..................................
,
F
Factory set........................................................
Fade function..................................................... 91
Focus function................................................... 87
Function Tree......................................................
G
Gain .................................................................... 30
Analog gain.................................................... 30
Digital gain .................................................... 34
Gain Compensation ................................... 34
Global Paste function ....................................... 85
GPI....................................................................
Graphic EQ......................................................
Libraries .......................................................
Operations ...................................................
Grouping............................................................ 64
H
HA (Head Amp) ............................................... 30
Help function ..................................................
Recalling.......................................................
Viewing ........................................................
I
I/O device.........................................................
Initialize ...........................................................
Input channels................................................... 27
Channel library ............................................. 45
Channel name and icon............................... 28
Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus ................... 39
Sending to STEREO/MONO buses ........... 35
Input Delay ........................................................ 44
Input patch ........................................................ 19
Inserting ............................................................. 21
Internal clock...................................................
Internal effects.................................................
L
Lamps ...............................................................
LEDs .................................................................
Linking ............................................................... 64
M
Master fader.................................................... 174
MATRIX buses...................................
MBCL meter bridge (optional) .................... 113
METER screen................................................ 111
Meters .............................................................. 111
MIDI ................................................................ 149
MIDI Data Format......................................... 264
MIDI Implementation Chart ....................... 275
MIX buses .................................................
MIX channels
Sending to MATRIX buses..........................
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ...............
Mixer Basic Parameters................................. 274
Mixing parameter operation applicability.. 254
Monitor function ....................................... 97
,
Mute groups................................................ 64
,
N
Network address ............................................ 205
NRPN parameter assignments..................... 250
Nuendo Live ................................................... 188
O
Oscillator .................................................
Output channels................................................
Channel library .............................................
Channel name and icon ...............................
Output Delay .....................................................
Output patch......................................................
OVERVIEW screen ..........................................
P
Parameter Changes........................................ 157
Parameters that can be assigned to
control changes ............................................. 248
Patching..............................................................
Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)............ 171
Preferences......................................................
Premium Rack................................................ 130
Libraries ...................................................... 137
Premium Rack Processor Parameters ......... 245
Preview mode ....................................................
Program Changes........................................... 152
276
Appendices
R
Recall Safe function..........................................
Recall scenes.............................................. 80
S
Scene memory ..................................................
Editing ...........................................................
Security ............................................................ 158
SELECTED CHANNEL section....................... 6
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen............ 7
SETUP screen ................................................. 196
Slot.................................................................... 198
STEREO/MONO buses.............................
STEREO/MONO channels
Sending to MATRIX buses .........................
T
Talkback .......................................................... 106
Title list ............................................................ 187
TOUCH AND TURN.................................... 171
Touch screen................................................... 204
U
USB flash drive
Formatting .................................................. 180
Loading a file .............................................. 178
Loading a Help file..................................... 193
Loading a text file....................................... 193
Playing back audio files ............................. 185
Recording audio ......................................... 183
Saving and loading setup data.................. 177
USB memory recorder................................... 181
USER DEFINED keys.................................... 169
Functions that can be assigned................. 259
Recalling Help ............................................ 194
USER DEFINED knobs................................. 171
Functions that can be assigned................. 262
User Level settings.......................................... 158
V
Virtual rack ..................................................... 114
Operations................................................... 115
W
Warning/Error Messages .............................. 271
Word clock...................................................... 198
Reference Manual
Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
C.S.G., Pro Audio Division
© 2012-2013 Yamaha Corporation
301IP-C0
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 1 How to Use This Reference Manual
- 2 Contents
- 4 Function Tree
- 6 SELECTED CHANNEL section
- 6 About the SELECTED CHANNEL section
- 6 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
- 7 SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
- 11 Centralogic section
- 11 About the Centralogic section
- 11 Operations in the Centralogic section
- 12 OVERVIEW screen
- 15 Input and output patching
- 15 CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching
- 16 Changing the output patch settings
- 19 Changing the input patch settings
- 21 Inserting an external device into a channel
- 23 Directly outputting an INPUT channel
- 25 Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer
- 27 Input channels
- 27 Signal flow for input channels
- 28 Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color
- 30 Making HA (Head Amp) settings
- 35 Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses
- 39 Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/ MATRIX bus
- 44 Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay)
- 45 Channel library operations
- 46 Output channels
- 46 Signal flow for output channels
- 47 Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color
- 48 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/ MONO bus
- 51 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/ MONO channels to MATRIX buses
- 55 Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)
- 55 Channel library operations
- 56 EQ and Dynamics
- 56 About EQ and dynamics
- 56 Using EQ
- 59 Using dynamics
- 63 Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries
- 64 Grouping and linking
- 64 About DCA groups and Mute groups
- 64 Using DCA groups
- 66 Using mute groups
- 70 Channel Link function
- 73 Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
- 77 Scene memory
- 77 About scene memories
- 77 Using scene memories
- 82 Editing scene memories
- 85 Using the Global Paste function
- 87 Using the Focus function
- 88 Using the Recall Safe function
- 91 Using the Fade function
- 93 Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
- 94 Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall
- 96 Using Preview mode
- 97 Monitor and Cue functions
- 97 About the Monitor and Cue functions
- 98 Using the Monitor function
- 101 Using the Cue function
- 102 Operating the Cue function
- 106 Talkback and Oscillator
- 106 About the Talkback and Oscillator functions
- 106 Using Talkback
- 108 Using the Oscillator function
- 111 Meters
- 111 Operations in the METER screen
- 113 Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console
- 114 Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
- 114 About the virtual rack
- 115 Virtual rack operations
- 118 Graphic EQ operations
- 122 About the internal effects
- 130 Using the Premium Rack
- 137 Using the graphic EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries
- 138 I/O device and external head amp
- 138 Using an I/O device
- 138 I/O device patching
- 140 Remotely controlling an Rio unit
- 143 Remotely controlling an amp
- 144 Using an external head amp
- 149 MIDI
- 149 MIDI functionality on the CL series console
- 149 Basic MIDI settings
- 152 Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items
- 155 Using Control Changes to control parameters
- 157 Using Parameter Changes to control parameters
- 158 User settings (Security)
- 158 User Level settings
- 168 Preferences
- 169 USER DEFINED keys
- 171 USER DEFINED knobs
- 172 Assignable encoders
- 173 Custom fader bank
- 174 Master fader
- 175 Console Lock
- 177 Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive
- 180 Formatting a USB flash drive
- 181 Recorder
- 181 About the USB memory recorder
- 181 Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder
- 183 Recording audio to a USB flash drive
- 185 Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
- 187 Editing the title list
- 188 Using the CL console with Nuendo Live
- 193 Help function
- 193 Loading a Help file from a USB flash drive
- 193 Loading a text file from a USB flash drive
- 194 Viewing Help
- 194 Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly
- 196 Other functions
- 196 About the SETUP screen
- 198 Word clock and slot settings
- 200 Using cascade connections
- 202 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
- 203 Switching the entire phantom power supply on/ off
- 204 Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps
- 204 Setting the date and time of the internal clock
- 205 Setting the network address
- 206 Initializing the unit to factory default settings
- 207 Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function)
- 208 Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
- 209 Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function)
- 211 Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)
- 212 Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display
- 213 Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display
- 213 Dante audio network settings
- 221 Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
- 227 Appendices
- 227 EQ Library List
- 228 DYNAMICS Library List
- 230 Dynamics Parameters
- 232 Effect Type List
- 233 Effects Parameters
- 245 Premium Rack Processor Parameters
- 247 Effects and tempo synchronization
- 248 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
- 250 NRPN parameter assignments
- 254 Mixing parameter operation applicability
- 259 Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
- 262 Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs
- 263 Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders
- 264 MIDI Data Format
- 271 Warning/Error Messages
- 273 Electrical characteristics
- 274 Mixer Basic Parameters
- 275 M IDI Implementation Chart
- 276 Index